—

ABB INDUSTRIAL DRIVES

ACS880-304…+A018 diode supply modules

Hardware manual
ACS880-304…+A018 diode supply
modules
Hardware manual

Table of contents

4. Cabinet construction

5. Electrical installation

7. Start-up

3AXD50000010104 Rev G
EN
Original instructions
EFFECTIVE: 2022-02-03
 Table of contents 5

Table of contents

1 Introduction to the manual

Contents of this chapter ........................................................................... 15
Applicability ......................................................................................... 15
Safety instructions ................................................................................. 15
Target audience .................................................................................... 15
Categorization by frame size and option code ................................................. 16
Use of component designations ................................................................. 16
Terms and abbreviations .......................................................................... 16
Related documents ................................................................................ 17

2 Operation principle and hardware description

Contents of this chapter ........................................................................... 19
Operation principle ................................................................................. 19
Overview diagram of the rectifier bridge .................................................... 20
6- and 12-pulse supply connections ......................................................... 20
Overview diagrams ................................................................................ 22
Overview diagram of the drive system ...................................................... 22
Overview diagram – 1×D8T, 6-pulse ........................................................ 24
Overview diagram – 2×D8T, 6-pulse ........................................................ 25
Overview diagram – 3×D8T, 6-pulse ........................................................ 26
Overview diagram – 2×D8T, 12-pulse ....................................................... 27
Hardware of the supply modules ................................................................ 28
Layout drawings of the supply modules ..................................................... 29
Layout drawing of D7T supply module .................................................. 29
Connectors X50 and X53 of D7T supply module ...................................... 30
Layout drawing of D8T supply module .................................................. 31
Connectors X50 and X53 of D8T supply module ...................................... 32
Overview of the control connections of the BCU control unit ................................ 33
Supply unit control devices ....................................................................... 34
Main disconnecting device .................................................................... 34
Auxiliary voltage switch ........................................................................ 34
Operating switch ................................................................................ 34
Emergency stop and emergency stop reset buttons ...................................... 34
The control unit ................................................................................. 35
Control panel .................................................................................... 35
PC connection .................................................................................. 35
Fieldbus control ................................................................................. 35
Type designation label ............................................................................ 36
Type designation key .............................................................................. 37

3 Moving and unpacking the module

Contents of this chapter ........................................................................... 39
Moving and lifting the transport package ....................................................... 39
Unpacking ........................................................................................... 39
Lifting the unpacked modules .................................................................... 40
6 Table of contents

Moving the unpacked modules .................................................................. 40

4 Cabinet construction
Contents of this chapter ........................................................................... 41
Limitation of liability ................................................................................ 41
Switching, disconnecting and protecting solution ............................................. 41
Auxiliary control cubicle ........................................................................... 42
Incoming cubicle ................................................................................... 42
Example of the AC fuse cooling .............................................................. 42
RFI filter ............................................................................................. 44
Configuration overviews of the supply module cubicles ...................................... 45
Configuration overviews – 6-pulse ........................................................... 45
Configuration overviews – 12-pulse ......................................................... 47
Layout drawings .................................................................................... 49
Layout drawing of the supply unit ............................................................ 49
Layout of supply module cubicle – 2×D7T, 12-pulse, in 600 mm wide Rittal VX25
enclosure ........................................................................................ 50
Layout of supply module cubicles – 1×D8T and 2×D8T, 6-pulse, in 400 mm / 600 mm
wide Rittal VX25 enclosures .................................................................. 51
Layout of supply module cubicles – 2×D8T and 4×D8T, 12-pulse, in 600 mm wide
Rittal VX25 enclosures ........................................................................ 52
Installation examples .............................................................................. 53
Construction of supply module cubicle – 2×D7T, 12-pulse, Rittal VX25 ............... 53
Kits for 2×D7T, 12-pulse, Rittal VX25 .................................................... 54
Stage 1: Installation of common parts ................................................... 55
Stage 2: Module installation parts ........................................................ 56
Stage 3: Module installation ............................................................... 57
Stage 4: AC busbars to the module ...................................................... 58
Stage 5: DC busbars to the module ...................................................... 59
Stage 6: Shroud installation ............................................................... 60
Construction of supply module cubicle – 1×D8T, 6-pulse, Rittal VX25 ................. 61
Kits for 1×D8T, 6-pulse, Rittal VX25 ..................................................... 62
Stage 1: Installation of common parts ................................................... 63
Stage 2: Module installation parts ........................................................ 64
Stage 3: Quick connector installation .................................................... 65
Stage 4: DC busbars to the module ...................................................... 66
Stage 5: AC busbars to quick connector ................................................ 67
Stage 6: AC busbar ......................................................................... 68
Stage 7: Module installation ............................................................... 69
Stage 8: Shroud installation ............................................................... 70
Construction of supply module cubicle – 1×D8T, 6-pulse generic cabinet ............. 71
Kits for 1×D8T, 6-pulse generic cabinet ................................................. 72
Construction of supply module cubicle – 2×D8T, 6-pulse, Rittal VX25 ................. 73
Kits for 2×D8T, 6-pulse, Rittal VX25 ..................................................... 74
Stage 1: Installation of common parts ................................................... 75
Stage 2: Module installation parts ........................................................ 76
Stage 3: Quick connector installation .................................................... 77
Stage 4: DC busbars ....................................................................... 78
Stage 5: AC busbars to quick connector ................................................ 79
Stage 6: AC fuse busbars installation .................................................... 80
Stage 7: Module installation ............................................................... 81
Stage 8: Shroud installation ............................................................... 82
 Table of contents 7

Construction of supply module cubicle – 2×D8T, 6- and 12-pulse, generic cabinet ... 83
Kits for 2×D8T, 6- and 12-pulse, generic cabinet ...................................... 84
Construction of supply module cubicle – 2×D8T, 12-pulse, Rittal VX25 ............... 85
Kits for 2×D8T, 12-pulse, Rittal VX25 .................................................... 86
Stage 1: Installation of common parts ................................................... 87
Stage 2: Module installation parts ........................................................ 88
Stage 3: Quick connectors ................................................................ 89
Stage 4: DC busbar installation ........................................................... 90
Stage 5: AC busbars to quick connector ................................................ 91
Stage 6: AC busbars to main AC installation ........................................... 92
Stage 7: Module installation, DC connection flanges .................................. 93
Stage 8: Shroud installation ............................................................... 94
Construction of supply module cubicle – 3×D8T, 6-pulse, generic cabinet ............ 95
Kits for 3×D8T, 6-pulse, generic cabinet ................................................. 96

5 Electrical installation
Contents of this chapter ........................................................................... 97
Safety and liability .................................................................................. 97
Electrical safety precautions ..................................................................... 98
General notes ...................................................................................... 99
Optical components ............................................................................ 99
Checking the insulation of the assembly ....................................................... 99
Measuring the insulation resistance of the drive ........................................... 99
Measuring the insulation resistance of the input power cable ........................... 99
Checking the compatibility with IT (ungrounded) systems ................................... 99
Connecting the power cables and busbars .................................................... 100
Connection diagram – 1×D8T, 6-pulse ...................................................... 100
Connection diagram – 2×D8T, 6-pulse ...................................................... 101
Connection diagram – 3×D8T, 6-pulse ...................................................... 102
Connection diagram – 2×D8T, 12-pulse .................................................... 103
Connection procedure ......................................................................... 104
Connecting auxiliary power to the diode supply module ..................................... 106
Connection procedure ......................................................................... 106
Connecting power supply for the control unit .................................................. 106
Connection procedure ......................................................................... 107
Connecting the control cables ................................................................... 107
Connection diagram ............................................................................ 107
Connection procedure ......................................................................... 107
Connecting a PC ............................................................................... 108
Installing option modules ...................................................................... 110

6 Installation checklist
Contents of this chapter ........................................................................... 111
Checklist ............................................................................................. 111

7 Start-up
Contents of this chapter ........................................................................... 115
Start-up procedure ................................................................................. 116
Basic checks with no voltage connected .................................................... 116
Connecting voltage to input terminals and auxiliary ....................................... 116
Setting the supply unit parameters .......................................................... 117
8 Table of contents

Powering up the drive .......................................................................... 117

Safety function validation ...................................................................... 118
On-load checks ................................................................................. 118
Switching the supply unit off ...................................................................... 118
Disconnecting and temporary grounding the drive ............................................ 118

8 Maintenance
Contents of this chapter ........................................................................... 119
Maintenance intervals ............................................................................. 119
Description of symbols ........................................................................ 119
Recommended maintenance intervals after start-up ...................................... 120
Cabinet .............................................................................................. 121
Cleaning the interior of the cabinet .......................................................... 121
Cleaning the door air inlets (IP22 and IP42) ............................................... 122
Replacing the inlet door filters (IP54) ........................................................ 123
Cleaning the roof outlet filters (IP54) ........................................................ 123
Power connections ................................................................................ 124
Retightening the power connections ........................................................ 124
Fuses ................................................................................................ 124
Checking and replacing the DC fuses of a D7T supply module ......................... 124
Checking and replacing the DC fuses of a D8T supply module ......................... 125
Checking and replacing the AC fuses ....................................................... 127
Fans .................................................................................................. 129
Replacing the fan of the D7T supply module ............................................... 129
Replacing the fan of the D8T supply module ............................................... 131
Replacing the direct-on-line fan (option +C188) of the D8T supply module ........... 132
Replacing the circuit board compartment fan .............................................. 134
Replacing the cabinet cooling fans .......................................................... 136
Cabinets with ABB air outlet kits .......................................................... 136
Cabinets with other fan types ............................................................. 136
Supply module ..................................................................................... 137
Cleaning the heatsink .......................................................................... 137
Replacing the D7T supply module ........................................................... 137
Replacing the D8T supply module ........................................................... 140
Control panel ....................................................................................... 145
Control unit .......................................................................................... 145
BCU control unit types ......................................................................... 145
Replacing the memory unit ................................................................... 146
Replacing the BCU control unit battery ..................................................... 146
LEDs and other status indicators ................................................................ 147
Control panel and panel platform/holder LEDs ............................................ 147
Module LEDs .................................................................................... 148
Reduced run ........................................................................................ 148
Starting reduced run operation ............................................................... 148
Resuming normal operation .................................................................. 149

9 Ordering information
Contents of this chapter ........................................................................... 151
Kit code key ......................................................................................... 151
Diode supply units – 2×D7T, 12-pulse .......................................................... 153
Diode supply modules – 2×D7T, 12-pulse .................................................. 153
 Table of contents 9

Mechanical installation accessories – 2×D7T, 12-pulse, Rittal VX25 ................... 154

Module installation parts ................................................................... 154
Shrouds ...................................................................................... 154
AC busbar support .......................................................................... 155
DC busbars .................................................................................. 155
Other components and tools – 2×D7T, 12-pulse .......................................... 155
Diode supply units – 1×D8T, 6-pulse ............................................................ 156
Diode supply modules – 1×D8T, 6-pulse ................................................... 156
Mechanical installation accessories – 1×D8T, 6-pulse, Rittal VX25 .................... 157
Module installation parts ................................................................... 157
Shrouds ...................................................................................... 157
AC busbars .................................................................................. 158
AC busbars to quick connector ........................................................... 158
DC busbars .................................................................................. 159
DC connection flanges ..................................................................... 159
Mechanical installation accessories – 1×D8T, 6-pulse, generic cabinet ............... 159
Module installation parts ................................................................... 159
AC busbars to quick connector ........................................................... 160
DC busbars .................................................................................. 160
DC connection flanges ..................................................................... 160
Other components and tools – 1×D8T, 6-pulse ............................................ 161
Diode supply units – 2×D8T, 6-pulse ............................................................ 162
Diode supply modules – 2×D8T, 6-pulse ................................................... 162
Mechanical installation accessories – 2×D8T, 6-pulse, Rittal VX25 .................... 163
Module installation parts ................................................................... 163
Shrouds ...................................................................................... 163
AC busbars .................................................................................. 164
AC busbars to quick connector ........................................................... 164
DC busbars .................................................................................. 165
DC connection flanges ..................................................................... 165
Mechanical installation accessories – 2×D8T, 6-pulse, generic cabinet ............... 165
Module installation parts ................................................................... 165
AC busbars to quick connector ........................................................... 166
DC busbars .................................................................................. 166
DC connection flanges ..................................................................... 166
Other components and tools – 2×D8T, 6-pulse ............................................ 167
Diode supply units – 2×D8T, 12-pulse .......................................................... 168
Diode supply modules – 2×D8T, 12-pulse .................................................. 168
Mechanical installation accessories – 2×D8T, 12-pulse, Rittal VX25 ................... 169
Module installation parts ................................................................... 169
Shrouds ...................................................................................... 169
AC busbars .................................................................................. 170
AC busbars to quick connector ........................................................... 170
DC busbars .................................................................................. 171
DC connection flanges ..................................................................... 171
Mechanical installation accessories and tool – 2×D8T, 12-pulse, generic cabinet ... 171
Module installation parts ................................................................... 171
AC busbars to quick connector ........................................................... 172
DC busbars .................................................................................. 172
DC connection flanges ..................................................................... 172
Other components and tools – 2×D8T, 12-pulse .......................................... 173
10 Table of contents

Diode supply units – 3×D8T, 6-pulse ............................................................ 174

Diode supply modules – 3×D8T, 6-pulse ................................................... 174
Mechanical installation accessories – 3×D8T, 6-pulse, Rittal VX25 .................... 175
Module installation parts ................................................................... 175
Shrouds ...................................................................................... 176
AC busbars .................................................................................. 177
AC busbars to quick connector ........................................................... 178
DC busbars .................................................................................. 179
DC connection flanges ..................................................................... 179
Mechanical installation accessories and tools – 3×D8T, 6-pulse, generic cabinet .... 180
Module installation parts ................................................................... 180
AC busbars to quick connector ........................................................... 180
DC busbars .................................................................................. 181
DC connection flanges ..................................................................... 181
Other components and tools – 3×D8T, 6-pulse ............................................ 181
Diode supply units – 4×D8T, 5×D8T and 6×D8T 6-pulse .................................... 182
Diode supply modules – 4×D8T, 5×D8T and 6×D8T 6-pulse ............................ 182
Mechanical installation accessories – 4×D8T, 5×D8T and 6×D8T 6-pulse ............ 183
Other components and tools – 4×D8T, 5×D8T and 6×D8T, 6-pulse .................... 183
Diode supply units – 4×D8T and 6×D8T 12-pulse ............................................ 184
Diode supply modules – 4×D8T and 6×D8T 12-pulse .................................... 184
Mechanical installation accessories ......................................................... 185
Other components and tools – 4×D8T and 6×D8T, 12-pulse ............................ 185
Control units ........................................................................................ 186
Control units – 6-pulse ......................................................................... 186
Control units – 12-pulse ....................................................................... 187
Fiber optic cables for supply modules .......................................................... 187
Control circuit plug connectors for supply modules ........................................... 188
Quick connector for D8T module ................................................................ 189
Main switch-disconnectors ....................................................................... 189
IEC main switch-disconnector kits – 6-pulse ............................................... 189
UL main switch-disconnector kits – 6-pulse ................................................ 190
IEC main switch-disconnector kits – 12-pulse ............................................. 191
UL main switch-disconnector kits – 12-pulse ............................................... 192
AC fuses ............................................................................................. 193
IEC/UL main AC fuses – 6-pulse ............................................................. 193
IEC/UL module-specific AC fuses – 6-pulse ............................................... 194
IEC main AC fuses – 12-pulse ............................................................... 194
UL main AC fuses – 12-pulse ................................................................ 195
IEC module-specific AC fuses – 12-pulse .................................................. 195
UL module-specific AC fuses – 12-pulse ................................................... 195
Main contactors .................................................................................... 196
IEC/UL main contactors – 6-pulse ........................................................... 196
IEC main contactors – 12-pulse .............................................................. 197
UL main contactors – 12-pulse ............................................................... 197
Main circuit breakers .............................................................................. 198
IEC main circuit breakers – 6-pulse 230 V ................................................. 198
UL main circuit breakers – 6-pulse 230 V .................................................. 200
IEC main circuit breakers – 12-pulse 230 V ................................................ 202
UL main circuit breakers – 12-pulse 230 V ................................................. 204
IEC main circuit breakers – 6-pulse 115 V .................................................. 206
UL/CSA main circuit breakers – 6-pulse 115 V ............................................ 208
 Table of contents 11

IEC main circuit breakers – 12-pulse 115 V ................................................ 210

UL/CSA main circuit breakers – 12-pulse 115 V ........................................... 212
IEC bus bar shim kit ............................................................................ 214
Main circuit breaker and wagon cover ...................................................... 214
Control panel ....................................................................................... 215
Ventilation kits ...................................................................................... 216
Air inlet kits ...................................................................................... 216
Air inlet kits 400 mm cabinet .............................................................. 216
Air inlet kits 600 mm cabinet .............................................................. 217
Air inlet kits 800 mm cabinet .............................................................. 218
Air outlet kits .................................................................................... 219
Air outlet kits 400 mm cabinet ............................................................. 219
Air outlet kits 600 mm cabinet ............................................................. 220
Cooling fans ..................................................................................... 221
Miscellaneous ...................................................................................... 221
Lifting device for the D7T supply module ................................................... 221
Pull-out ramp for the D8T supply module ................................................... 222
Bracket for Rittal Flat-PLS busbar holder (common AC) ................................. 222
DC bus installation parts (for Rittal VX25 enclosures) .................................... 223
RFI filters ........................................................................................ 223

10 Technical data
Contents of this chapter ........................................................................... 225
Ratings .............................................................................................. 225
Derating .......................................................................................... 227
Surrounding air temperature derating .................................................... 227
Altitude derating ............................................................................. 227
Type equivalence table and frame sizes ....................................................... 228
Fuses ................................................................................................ 229
AC fuses ......................................................................................... 229
Supply module internal DC fuses ............................................................ 229
Dimensions and weights .......................................................................... 230
Free space requirements ......................................................................... 231
Allowable mounting orientations ................................................................. 231
Losses, cooling data and noise .................................................................. 232
Auxiliary circuit current/power consumption ................................................... 233
Cooling fans ..................................................................................... 234
Typical power cable sizes ......................................................................... 235
Tightening torques ................................................................................. 237
Electrical connections .......................................................................... 237
Mechanical connections ....................................................................... 237
Insulation supports ............................................................................. 237
Cable lugs ....................................................................................... 237
Electrical power network specification .......................................................... 238
DC connection data ................................................................................ 238
Efficiency ............................................................................................ 239
Energy efficiency data (ecodesign) .............................................................. 239
Control unit connection data ..................................................................... 239
Optical components ............................................................................... 239
Protection classes for module .................................................................... 239
Ambient conditions ................................................................................ 240
Cooling .............................................................................................. 240
12 Table of contents

Materials ............................................................................................. 241

Module housing ................................................................................. 241
Fire safety of materials (IEC 60332-1) ...................................................... 241
Package ......................................................................................... 241
Disposal .......................................................................................... 241
Standards ........................................................................................... 241
Markings ............................................................................................. 241
Disclaimers ......................................................................................... 241
Generic disclaimer ............................................................................. 241
Cybersecurity disclaimer ...................................................................... 241

11 The control unit

Contents of this chapter ........................................................................... 243
General .............................................................................................. 243
BCU-x2 layout ...................................................................................... 244
Default I/O diagram of the supply control unit ................................................. 246
External power supply for the control unit (XPOW) ........................................... 248
Safe torque off (XSTO, XSTO OUT) ............................................................ 248
FSO-xx safety functions module connection (X12) ........................................... 248
SDHC memory card slot .......................................................................... 248
Connector data ..................................................................................... 249
BCU-x2 ground isolation diagram ............................................................ 252

12 Dimension drawings
Contents of this chapter ........................................................................... 253
Dimensions of D7T supply module .............................................................. 254
Dimensions of D8T supply module .............................................................. 255
Dimensions of quick connector for D8T module ............................................... 256
Dimensions of the pull-out ramp for D8T module ............................................. 257
Dimensions of BCU control unit ................................................................. 258
Dimensions of ACS-AP-x control panel with DPMP-01 door mounting kit ................ 259
Dimensions of main switch-disconnectors ..................................................... 260
Dimensions of OT1250E12 ................................................................... 260
Dimensions of OT1250E12DD (IEC) ........................................................ 261
Dimensions of OT2000E12 (IEC) ............................................................ 262
Dimensions of OT1200U12 (UL) ............................................................. 263
Dimensions of switch-disconnector auxiliary contacts .................................... 263
Dimensions of switch-disconnector handle ................................................. 264
Dimensions of AC fuses .......................................................................... 265
Dimensions of 170M6411, 170M6412, 170M6413, 170M6414, 170M6415, 170M6416,
170M6417, 170M6419 ......................................................................... 265
Dimensions of 170M7062, 170M7063, 170M7064 ........................................ 266
Dimensions of main contactors .................................................................. 267
Dimensions of AF1250-30-22-70 ............................................................ 267
Dimensions of AF2050-30-22-70 ............................................................ 268
Dimensions of AF1650-30-22-70 ............................................................ 269
Dimensions of main circuit breakers ............................................................ 270
E2.2S-A (UL/CSA/IEC) ........................................................................ 270
E4.2S (IEC) ..................................................................................... 271
E4.2S-A (UL/CSA/IEC) ........................................................................ 272
E6.2V (IEC) ..................................................................................... 273
 Table of contents 13

E6.2V-A (UL/CSA/IEC) ........................................................................ 274

Miscellaneous components ....................................................................... 275
IP54 roof fan (IEC/UL) in 600 mm enclosure ............................................... 275
RFI filter and related accessories ............................................................ 276
RFI filter ...................................................................................... 276
Oval toroid kit ................................................................................ 277
Oval toroid ................................................................................... 278

13 Example circuit diagrams

Contents of this chapter ........................................................................... 279
Component designations used in the diagrams ............................................... 279
2×D8T 6-pulse circuit diagrams .............................................................. 279
5×D8T 6-pulse circuit diagrams .............................................................. 280
2×D7T 12-pulse circuit diagrams ............................................................ 280
Differences of 2×D8T 6-pulse, 5×D8T 6-pulse and 2×D7T 12-pulse circuit diagrams . 280
Circuit diagram set contents ...................................................................... 281
ACS880-304-1820A-3+A018+C183+C188 (2×D8T 6-pulse connection) ................. 282
Sheet 001 – Main supply ...................................................................... 282
Sheet 002 – Main line, module connections ................................................ 283
Sheet 020 – Auxiliary voltage distribution .................................................. 284
Sheet 050 – BCU-02 control unit ............................................................. 285
Sheet 060 – Emergency stop +Q963 ........................................................ 286
ACS880-304-4560A-3+A018+C183 (5×D8T 6-pulse connection) .......................... 287
Sheet 001 – Main supply ...................................................................... 287
Sheet 002 – Main line, module connections ................................................ 288
Sheet 020 – Auxiliary voltage distribution .................................................. 289
Sheet 030 – Main circuit breaker control .................................................... 290
Sheet 050 – BCU-12 control unit ............................................................. 291
ACS880-304-0910A-3+A003+A018+C188 (2×D7T 12-pulse connection) ................ 292
Sheet 001 – Main supply ...................................................................... 292
Sheet 002 – Main line, module connections ................................................ 293
Sheet 020 – Auxiliary voltage distribution .................................................. 294
Sheet 050 – BCU-02 control unit ............................................................. 295

Further information
14
 Introduction to the manual 15

1
Introduction to the manual

Contents of this chapter

This chapter gives basic information on the manual.

Applicability
The manual is applicable to the ACS880-304…+A018 diode supply modules with
diode-thyristor bridges.

Safety instructions
Obey all safety instructions delivered with the drive.
• Read the complete safety instructions before you install, commission, use or service
the drive. The complete safety instructions are given in ACS880 multidrive cabinets
and modules safety instructions (3AUA0000102301 [English]).
• Read the software-function-specific warnings and notes before changing the default
settings of a function. For each function, the warnings and notes are given in the section
describing the related user-adjustable parameters.
• Read the task-specific safety instructions before starting the task. See the section
describing the task.

Target audience
This manual is intended for people who plan the installation, install, commission and do
maintenance work on the drive, or create instructions for the end user of the drive concerning
the installation and maintenance of the drive.
Read the manual before working on the drive. You are expected to know the fundamentals
of electricity, wiring, electrical components and electrical schematic symbols.
16 Introduction to the manual

Categorization by frame size and option code

The information which concerns only certain supply module frame sizes is marked with the
frame size identifier. The frame size identifier is D7T or D8T. If there are several parallel
modules, also the number of parallel modules is shown, for example 2×D8T. See the technical
data for the DSU unit types and their frame sizes. The frame size is also shown on the
module type designation label.
The information which concern only certain option device or feature is marked with the
option code. For example: cabinet heating element (option +C183). An option code starts
with a plus sign. The codes are listed in section Type designation key (page 37).

Use of component designations

Some device names in the manual include the item designation in brackets, for example
[Q20], to make it possible to identify the components in the circuit diagrams of the drive.

Terms and abbreviations

Term Description
BCON Type of control board
BCU Type of control unit
BDPS Module internal power supply board
BFPS Control and power supply board for speed-controlled cooling fan
Control unit The part in which the control program runs.
Cubicle One section of a cabinet-installed drive. A cubicle is typically behind a door of its own.
D7T Frame size designation of the diode supply module
D8T Frame size designation of the diode supply module
DC link DC circuit between rectifier and inverter
DI Digital input
Diode supply module Diode rectifier and related components enclosed in a metal frame or enclosure. Inten-
ded for cabinet installation.
Diode supply unit Diode supply modules under control of one control board, and related components.
Drive Frequency converter for controlling AC motors
DSU Diode supply unit
FCAN Optional CANopen® adapter module
FCNA-01 Optional ControlNet™ adapter module
FDCO-01 DDCS communication module with two pairs of 10 Mbit/s DDCS channels
FDNA-01 Optional DeviceNet™ adapter module
FEA-03 Optional I/O extension adapter
FECA-01 Optional EtherCAT® adapter module
FENA-11 Optional Ethernet adapter module for EtherNet/IP™, Modbus TCP® and PROFINET
IO® protocols
FENA-21 Optional Ethernet adapter module for EtherNet/IP™, Modbus TCP® and PROFINET
IO® protocols, 2-port
FEPL-01 Optional Ethernet POWERLINK adapter module
FIO-01 Optional digital I/O extension module
FIO-11 Optional analog I/O extension module
FPBA-01 Optional PROFIBUS DP® adapter module
Frame, frame size Physical size of the drive or power module
FSCA-01 Optional RS-485 (Modbus/RTU) adapter
ICU Incoming unit
Intermediate circuit DC circuit between rectifier and inverter
 Introduction to the manual 17

Term Description
INU Inverter unit
Inverter Converts direct current and voltage to alternating current and voltage.
Inverter module Inverter bridge, related components and drive DC link capacitors enclosed in a metal
frame or enclosure. Intended for cabinet installation.
Inverter unit Inverter module(s) under control of one control unit, and related components. One
inverter unit typically controls one motor.
Multidrive Drive for controlling several motors which are typically coupled to the same machinery.
Includes one supply unit, and one or several inverter units.
Parameter In the drive control program, user-adjustable operation instruction to the drive, or
signal measured or calculated by the drive.
In some (for example fieldbus) contexts, a value that can be accessed as an object.
For example, variable, constant, or signal.
Rectifier Converts alternating current and voltage to direct current and voltage
Single drive Drive for controlling one motor
STO Safe torque off (IEC/EN 61800-5-2)
VX25 Enclosure system by Rittal (http://www.rittal.com)

Related documents
Manual Code
General manuals
ACS880 multidrive cabinets and modules safety instructions 3AUA0000102301
ACS880 multidrive cabinets and modules electrical planning instructions 3AUA0000102324
Drive modules cabinet design and construction instructions 3AUA0000107668
BCU-02/12/22 control units hardware manual 3AUA0000113605
Supply module manuals
ACS880-204 IGBT supply modules hardware manual 3AUA0000131525
ACS880 IGBT supply control program firmware manual 3AUA0000131562
ACS880-304…+A003 diode supply modules hardware manual 3AUA0000102452
ACS880-304…+A018 diode supply modules hardware manual 3AXD50000010104
ACS880 diode supply control program firmware manual 3AUA0000103295
ACS880-904 regenerative rectifier modules hardware manual 3AXD50000020457
ACS880 regenerative rectifier control program firmware manual 3AXD50000020827
Inverter module manuals and guides
ACS880-104 inverter modules hardware manual 3AUA0000104271
ACS880 primary control program firmware manual 3AUA0000085967
ACS880 primary control program quick start-up guide 3AUA0000098062
Brake module and DC/DC converter module manuals
ACS880-604 1-phase brake chopper modules hardware manual 3AUA0000106244
ACS880-604 3-phase dynamic brake modules as units hardware manual 3AXD50000022033
ACS880 (3-phase) brake control program firmware manual 3AXD50000020967
ACS880-1604 DC/DC converter modules hardware manual 3AXD50000023642
ACS880 DC/DC converter control program firmware manual 3AXD50000024671
Module package hardware manuals
ACS880-04 single drive module packages (560 to 2200 kW) hardware manual 3AUA0000138495
ACS880-14 and -34 single drive module packages (160 to 2200 kW) hardware manual 3AXD50000022021
18 Introduction to the manual

Manual Code
Option manuals
ACS880 +C132 marine type-approved drive modules and module packages supplement 3AXD50000037752
ACX-AP-x assistant control panels user’s manual 3AUA0000085685
BAMU-12C auxiliary measurement unit hardware manual 3AXD50000117840
Drive composer start-up and maintenance PC tool user’s manual 3AUA0000094606
Drive application programming (IEC 61131-3) manual 3AUA0000127808
Converter module lifting device for drive cabinets hardware manual 3AXD50000210268
Installation frames for ACS880 multidrive modules hardware manual 3AXD50000010531
Manuals and quick guides for I/O extension modules, fieldbus adapters, safety functions modules, etc.

See www.abb.com/drives/documents for all manuals on the Internet.

You can find all documentation related to the multidrive modules on the Internet at
https://sites-apps.abb.com/sites/lvacdrivesengineeringsupport/content.
 Operation principle and hardware description 19

2
Operation principle and hardware
description

Contents of this chapter

This chapter contains a description of the diode supply unit. The information is valid for the
units with ACS880-304…+A018 diode supply modules.

Operation principle
The core of the diode supply unit is a diode-thyristor bridge. It rectifies three-phase AC
current to direct current for the intermediate DC link of the drive. The intermediate DC link
supplies the inverters that run the motors. There can be one inverter unit only (single drives)
or several inverter units (multidrives) connected to the intermediate circuit. The DSU modules
have inbuilt AC chokes. The AC chokes smoothen the current waveform in the power supply
network and voltage in the DC link of the drive.
The main difference between the ordinary diode-diode bridge and the controlled
diode-thyristor bridge is the controllability. You cannot control the operation of the diodes
but you can control the thyristors. By controlling the thyristors, you can limit the AC current
of the drive at the power up without additional charging circuit in the supply unit or in inverter
units.
There are two control modes for the upper leg thyristor firing: the charging mode and the
normal mode:
• The charging mode is in operation a short period after the power switch on: the supply
control program controls the thyristor firing angle gradually towards zero while the
intermediate circuit capacitors located in the inverter module(s) get charged.
• In the normal mode, the thyristor firing angle is 0 degrees: The thyristors operate as
diodes.
20 Operation principle and hardware description

￭ Overview diagram of the rectifier bridge

2 4

1 4

1 Diodes. The diodes connect the AC terminals in cyclic sequence to the lower DC busbar (-).
2 Thyristors. The thyristors connect the AC line terminals in cyclic sequence to the upper DC busbar (+).
3 AC chokes
4 DC fuses

￭ 6- and 12-pulse supply connections

The figure below illustrates the difference between 6-pulse and 12-pulse AC supply
connections. 6-pulse connection is standard.
If the drive has an even number of supply modules, you can order it as a 12-pulse version
(option +A004).
The 12-pulse supply connection eliminates the fifth and seventh harmonics, which
substantially reduces the harmonic distortion of the line current and the conducted emissions.
The 12-pulse connection requires a three-winding transformer, or two separate transformers.
There is a phase shift of 30-degrees between the two 6-pulse supply lines, which are
connected to different supply modules through electrically separate switching equipment.
 Operation principle and hardware description 21

A


 

B

 

A 6-pulse connection
B 12-pulse connection
1 Supply transformer
2 Switching equipment
3 Diode supply modules
22 Operation principle and hardware description

Overview diagrams
This section contains main circuit overview diagrams. The diagrams show the power line
connections, and the connections between the components. The supply unit overview
diagrams also show examples of division of components in cubicles, and indicate which
components you can order from ABB and which you need to acquire separately.

￭ Overview diagram of the drive system

This diagram shows an example of a multidrive. The supply unit connects the drive to the
AC supply network. It converts the AC voltage into DC. The DC voltage is distributed through
the DC bus to all inverter units and optional brake units. The inverter unit converts the DC
back to AC that rotates the motor. The brake unit (optional) conveys energy to brake resistors
whenever needed.
 Operation principle and hardware description 23

B C C D
5

7 7 7 7

6 9

4 8 8 10

3 12

1 13 11

A Incoming unit
B Supply unit
C Inverter unit
D Brake unit (optional)

1 AC supply
2 Main breaker, or main contactor and main switch-disconnector
3 Input (AC) fuses
4 Supply module
5 DC bus
6 Supply and inverter module DC fuses
7 DC switch/disconnector (optional)
8 Inverter modules
9 Brake chopper fuses
10 3-phase brake chopper module (optional)
11 Brake resistors (optional or acquired by user)
12 Fuses for the brake resistors
13 Motor(s) (acquired by user)
24 Operation principle and hardware description

￭ Overview diagram – 1×D8T, 6-pulse

This is an overview diagram of a 6-pulse supply unit with one D8T supply module.

1 AC supply
A Incoming cubicle (ICU) 2 Main switch-disconnector 1)
3 Main AC fuses 1)
4 Main contactor 1)
B Diode supply module cubicle 5 Diode supply module (DC fuses included)2)
6 DC link
7 Connection to drive DC link

1) Available through ABB or third party

2) Available through ABB
 Operation principle and hardware description 25

￭ Overview diagram – 2×D8T, 6-pulse

This is an overview diagram of a 6-pulse supply unit with two D8T supply modules. The
diagram on the left shows an alternative with a main switch-disconnector and optional
contactor. The diagram on the right shows an alternative with a main circuit breaker. For
more information, see Switching, disconnecting and protecting solution (page 41).

1 AC supply
A Incoming cubicle (ICU) 2 Main switch-disconnector 1)
3 Main AC fuse 1)
4 Contactor (optional) 1)
5 Main circuit breaker 1)
B Diode supply module cubicle 6 AC fuses for diode supply modules 1)
7 Diode supply modules (DC fuses included) 2)
8 DC link
9 Connection to drive DC link

1) Available through ABB or third party

2) Available through ABB
26 Operation principle and hardware description

￭ Overview diagram – 3×D8T, 6-pulse

This is an overview diagram of a 6-pulse supply unit with three D8T supply modules.

1 AC supply
A Incoming cubicle (ICU) 2 Main breaker 1)
B Diode supply module cubicle 3 AC fuses for diode supply modules 1)
4 Diode supply modules (DC fuses included) 2)
5 DC link
6 Connection to drive DC link

1) Available through ABB or third party

2) Available through ABB
 Operation principle and hardware description 27

￭ Overview diagram – 2×D8T, 12-pulse

This is an overview diagram of a 12-pulse supply unit with two D8T supply modules.

1a AC supply. Winding Y
1b AC supply. Winding D
A Incoming cubicle (ICU) 2 Main switch-disconnector (6-pole) 1)
3 Main AC fuses 1)
4 Main contactors 1)
B Diode supply module cubicle 5 Diode supply modules (DC fuses included) 2)
6 DC link
7 Connection to drive DC link

1) Available through ABB or third party

2) Available through ABB
28 Operation principle and hardware description

Hardware of the supply modules

The D8T modules run on wheels, and can easily be removed from the cubicle for cable
installation or service. For moving the D7T modules you need a lifting device. The quick
connector for the AC supply input at the back of the D8T module couples when the module
is inserted into the cubicle.
The control electronics of the supply module need to be powered from an external auxiliary
voltage source. The speed-controlled cooling fan (delivered as standard) is supplied internally
from DC. If a direct-on-line fan (option +C188) is used, the user must connect the fan supply
to the module control connector [X50.1].
The supply modules are controlled by a single BCU control unit installed separately from
the module(s). The control unit is connected to each supply module by a fiber optic link.
The control unit can be powered from a module connector [X53], from an external 24 V DC
supply, or both for redundancy. The control unit contains the basic I/Os and slots for optional
I/O modules. For descriptions of the I/O terminals on the BCU control unit, see chapter The
control unit (page 243).
The D7T modules are cULus listed and CSA certified as standard. For D8T modules, UL/CSA
approval is optional (options +C129 and +C134).
 Operation principle and hardware description 29
„
￭ Layout drawings of the supply modules
Layout drawing of D7T supply module

$ %

 







A D7T supply module, front

B D7T supply module, back
1 AC input busbars
2 DC output busbars
3 Type designation label
4 Cover of the module’s DC fuses
5 Lifting eyes
6 Fan
7 Unpainted fastening hole. Grounding point (PE) between module frame and cabinet frame.
8 Terminal block [X53]. 24 V DC power for supply module control unit.
9 Terminal block [X50] (DOL fan supply, option +C188)
10 Fiber optic connectors. Communication link to the supply module control unit.
When speed-controlled fan is in use: Communication link to fan control unit.
30 Operation principle and hardware description

Connectors X50 and X53 of D7T supply module

Connector X50
9
8
Not in use.
7
6
5 N 115/230 V AC input for internal power supply (BDPS) (115V
with option +G304)
4 L
3 PE 115/230 V AC (50/60 Hz) supply for optional DOL (direct-on-
line) cooling fan (option +C188).
2 N
Note: In modules without +C188, the DOL wiring is present
1 L
but not in use.

Connector X53

24V OUT
X53
FE

24V

GND

24V

GND
 Operation principle and hardware description 31

Layout drawing of D8T supply module

$ B



 






A D8T supply module, front

B D8T supply module, back
1 AC quick connector and AC input busbars
2 DC output busbars
3 Type designation label
4 Cover of the module’s DC fuses
5 Lifting eyes
6 Fan
7 Unpainted fastening hole. Grounding point (PE) between module frame and cabinet frame.
8 Terminal block [X53] (24 V DC power for supply module control unit)
9 Terminal block [X50] (power supply for internal boards and module heating element, option +C183; DOL
fan supply, option +C188)
10 Fiber optic connectors. Communication link to the supply module control unit.
When speed-controlled fan is in use: Communication link to fan control unit.
11 Wheels
32 Operation principle and hardware description

Connectors X50 and X53 of D8T supply module

Connector X50
9 Not in use.
8 N 115/230 V AC (50/60 Hz) input for optional heating element
(+C183)
7 L
6 Not in use.
5 N 115/230 V AC 50 Hz input for internal power supply (BDPS)
(115 V AC 60 Hz with option +G304)
4 L
3 W 400 V AC (50/60 Hz) supply for optional DOL (direct-online)
cooling fan (option +C188).
2 V
Note: In modules without +C188, the DOL wiring is present
1 U
but not in use.

Connector X53

24V OUT
X53
FE

24V

GND

24V

GND
 Operation principle and hardware description 33

Overview of the control connections of the BCU control

„
unit
The diagram shows the control connections and interfaces of the BCU control unit.

CLOSE
7

9 FXX
1

FXX
2

3
F XXX
6
5 10

1 Analog and digital I/O extension modules and 7 Control panel.

2 fieldbus communication modules can be inserted
3 into slots 1, 2 and 3.
4 Memory unit 8 Fiber optic links to power modules (inverter,
supply, brake or converter)
5 Slot 4 for RDCO-0x 9 Ethernet port. Not in use.
6 Terminal blocks. 10 Safety option interface. Only in use for the invert-
er units.
34 Operation principle and hardware description

Supply unit control devices

A supply unit is typically controlled using the local control devices installed on the cabinet
door. No additional control connections are needed. However, it is possible to:
• control the supply unit through the control panel and fieldbus
• read the status information of the supply unit through the control panel, fieldbus and
relay output
• stop the supply unit with an externally wired emergency stop button (if the unit is
equipped with an emergency stop option).
The supply unit I/O control interface is in internal use. See section The control unit (page 243).
The data in brackets, for example [Q1], refer to the item designations in ABB example circuit
diagrams.

￭ Main disconnecting device

You must equip the supply unit with a main disconnecting device. For example, you can
use a main switch-disconnector [Q1.1] or a withdrawable main circuit breaker [Q1]. With
this switch, you can isolate the main circuit of the drive from the power line.

WARNING!
The main disconnecting device does not isolate the input power terminals or the
auxiliary circuit from the power line. To isolate the input power terminals, open the
main breaker of the supply transformer and lock it to the open position.

￭ Auxiliary voltage switch

You can equip the unit with an auxiliary voltage switch [Q21]. Using the switch, you can
disconnect the auxiliary circuit from the power line.

￭ Operating switch
You can equip the supply unit with the two-position operating switch [S21]. Connect the
switch to Run/Enable digital input of the control unit.
By default, the operating switch controls the unit as follows:
• The Run/Enable position: The control program receives the Run/Enable and Start
command through digital input DI2. The control program closes the main contactor [Q2]
or main breaker with relay output RO3. The module starts rectifying and charges the
DC link of the drive.
• The Off position: The control program does not receive the Run/Enable command
through the digital input. The program opens the main contactor [Q2] or main breaker
with the relay output and the module stops rectifying. The drive DC link and inverters
are de-energized after the DC capacitors de-charges.
For more information on the on/off control logic, see ACS880 diode supply control program
firmware manual (3AUA0000103295 [English]).

￭ Emergency stop and emergency stop reset buttons

The cabinet can be equipped with an emergency stop button and an emergency stop reset
button.
 Operation principle and hardware description 35

Note: The customer is fully responsible for implementing and testing the functional safety
circuits according to the relevant legislation and acceptance testing regulations. The functional
safety option manuals give examples on implementing the safety circuits in cabinet-installed
ACS880 multidrives.

￭ The control unit

The supply module is controlled by a BCU control unit.

￭ Control panel
The control panel is the user interface of the unit. With the control panel, you can:
• start and stop the unit
• view and reset the fault and warning messages, and view the fault history
• view actual signals
• change parameter settings
• change between local and external control.
To be able to start and stop the unit by the control panel, you must have the Run enable
signal and Start enable signal on (1) on the control board. Normally this means, that you
must have the operating switch on the cabinet door in ENABLE/RUN position. The control
panel must also be in local control mode. You can select the mode with the Loc/Rem key
on the panel.
For the instructions on the use of the panel, see ACX-AP-x Assistant control panels user's
manual (3AUA0000085685 [English]).

￭ PC connection
There is a USB connector on the front of the control panel that can be used to connect a
PC to the drive. When a PC is connected to the control panel, the control panel keypad is
disabled.

￭ Fieldbus control
You can control the unit through a fieldbus interface if the unit is equipped with an optional
fieldbus adapter and when you have configured the control program for the fieldbus control
with the parameters. For information on the parameters, see the firmware manual.
Note: To be able to switch the main contactor [Q2] or main circuit breaker [Q1] and the
supply unit on and off (Run enable signal) through the fieldbus, the Run enable command
at digital input DI2 must be on (1).
36 Operation principle and hardware description

Type designation label

Each diode supply module has a type designation label attached to it. The type designation
stated on the label contains information on the specifications and configuration of the unit.
Quote the complete type designation and serial number when contacting technical support
on the subject of individual diode supply modules.
An example label is shown below.

4
5

2
6

1 Frame size
2 Cooling method and degree of protection
3 Type designation. See section Type designation key (page 37).
4 Ratings. See the technical data.
5 Valid markings. See ACS880 multidrive cabinets and modules electrical planning instructions
(3AUA0000102324 [English]).
6 Serial number. The first digit of the serial number refers to the manufacturing plant. The next four digits
refer to the unit’s manufacturing year and week, respectively. The remaining digits complete the serial
number so that there are no two units with the same number.
 Operation principle and hardware description 37

Type designation key

Type designation describes the composition of the supply module in short. The type
designation is visible on the label (sticker) which is attached to the module. The complete
designation is divided in subcodes:
• The first 1…18 digits form the basic code. It describes the basic construction of the
unit. The fields in the basic code are separated with hyphens.
• The option codes follow the basic code. Each option code starts with an identifying
letter (common for the whole product series), followed by descriptive digits. The option
codes are separated by plus signs.
The following table lists the subcodes. The example code is: ACS880-304-0980A-3+A018.

Code Description
Basic code
ACS880 Product series
304 Construction: module for the cabinet installation. The module delivery includes a speed-controlled
cooling fan supplied from the DC bus as standard.
0980A Size. See the technical data.
3 380…415 V. This is indicated in the type designation label as typical input voltage level 3 ~ 400 V AC.
5 380…500 V. This is indicated in the type designation label as typical input voltage levels 3 ~
400/480/500 V AC.
7 525…690 V (525…600 V AC for UL/CSA). This is indicated in the type designation label as typical
input voltage levels 3 ~ 525/600/690 V AC (600 V AC for UL/CSA).
Option codes
A004 12-pulse option of half-controlled diode-thyristor bridge
A018 Half-controlled diode-thyristor bridge (as standard)
C129 cULus listed (D8T) *)
C132 Marine type approval *)
C134 CSA certified (D8T) *)
C183 Internal heating element in the module (D8T) *)
C188 Direct-on-line (DOL) cooling fan *)
G304 115 V auxiliary voltage supply for the module *)
P904 Extended warranty 24/30
P909 Extended warranty 36/42
P911 Extended warranty 60/66

*) See the ordering information for the relevant module(s).

38
 Moving and unpacking the module 39

3
Moving and unpacking the module

Contents of this chapter

This chapter gives basic information on moving, unpacking and lifting the modules.

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions of the drive. If you ignore them, injury or death,
or damage to the equipment can occur.

Moving and lifting the transport package

Move the transport package by a pallet truck or lift. Lift the transport package in a horizontal
position. Use soft lifting slings.

Unpacking
The module is delivered on a wooden base, boxed in corrugated cardboard. The cardboard
box is tied to the base with PET bands.
1. Cut off the bands.
2. Lift off the cardboard box.
3. Remove any filling material.
4. Cut open the plastic wrapping of the module.
5. Lift off the module.
6. Check that there are no signs of damage.
Dispose of or recycle the packaging according to the local regulations.
40 Moving and unpacking the module

3AUA0000131400

Lifting the unpacked modules

Lift the unpacked module only by its lifting eyes.

Moving the unpacked modules

WARNING!
For general safety instructions for moving the module, see ACS880 multidrive
cabinets and modules safety instructions (3AUA0000102301 [English]).

For moving the module, see section Replacing the D7T supply module (page 137) and
Replacing the D8T supply module (page 140).
For moving the D7T modules you need a lifting device.
 Cabinet construction 41

4
Cabinet construction
10

Contents of this chapter

This chapter gives instructions on how to install the modules and additional equipment into
a cabinet.
For general instructions, see Drive modules cabinet design and construction instructions
(3AUA0000107668 [English]).

Limitation of liability
The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable local laws and
regulations. ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any installation which breaches
the local laws and/or other regulations. Furthermore, if the recommendations given by ABB
are not followed, the drive may experience problems that the warranty does not cover.

Switching, disconnecting and protecting solution

To arrange the switching, disconnection and protection of the ACS880-304…+A018 module,
you can use the following solution:
1. Equip the drive with a disconnector (main switch-disconnector or a main breaker) [Q1].
(A contactor is not obligatory.) See also Main switch-disconnectors (page 189) and Main
circuit breakers (page 198). The disconnector must separate the whole drive cabinet
from the AC power line, including the AC fuses if they are placed in the drive cabinet.
2. Equip the drive with AC fuses to protect the unit against short circuit. Protect each input
terminal of the supply module with a fuse of its own. For more information, see AC
fuses (page 193).
See also Electrical safety precautions (page 98) and Example circuit diagrams (page 279).
 42 Cabinet construction

Auxiliary control cubicle

Place the supply control unit and other control components outside the supply module
cubicle(s). ABB recommends a separate auxiliary control cubicle in the cabinet line up.
There is an example in section Layout drawing of the supply unit (page 49).

Incoming cubicle
ABB recommends a separate incoming cubicle beside the supply module cubicle for the
main AC fuses and switching and disconnecting devices. There is an example in section
Layout drawing of the supply unit (page 49).

„ ￭ Example of the AC fuse cooling

The AC fuses must be cooled by forced cooling. If the fuses are not located in the same
cubicle with the supply/rectifier module, the module cooling fan does not supply the cooling
air for the fuses but you must use a separate cooling fan.
The following figures show an example of the cooling system using a thermal switch for the
air temperature monitoring near the AC fuses.

Description
1 Thermal switch
2 Cooling fan

2
 Cabinet construction 43
Example of the AC fuse cooling and temperature
 monitoring

MAIN SUPPLY Main Contactor

DISCONN. SWITCH MAIN AC FUSES TEMP. CONTROL OPTIONAL

=-Q1.1
=-F1.1 =-Q2.1
1 2 1 2 1 2 ;1L11
=-F1.2 =-F6.1
3 4 1 2 3 4 ;1L21
002/2B
1 2
=-F1.3
5 6 1 2 5 6 ;1L31
13 14 020/13D
050/11D

=-X22
49 38

=-Q21

13
001/4C

14
=-Q1.1 =-Q2.1

13

13
001/5A 020/13D

14

14
13
=-S21

0
15C

1
14
=-A51
5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
-XD24 -XDI
CONTROL UNIT
BCU-X2

DCCOM
S7

0VD
DIOGND
DICOM
+24VD
+24DI

DI1...DI6+DIIL; NOMINAL VOLTAGE 24VDC

DEFAULT INPUT DESIGNATION

CIRCUIT BRK FAULT_01

MCB FEEDBACK_01

EARTH FAULT_01
RUN ENABLE_01
TEMP FAULT_01

EM STOP_01
RESET_01
10
-DI1

-DI2

-DI3

-DI4

-DI5

-DI6

-DIIL

Example connection for the temperature monitoring

7KHUHIHUHQFHVLQWKLVILJXUHDUHLQFKDSWHUExample circuit diagramsSDJH287
Note: The connection of temperature monitoring requires proper insulation between busbars and thermal
1RWH7KHFRQQHFWLRQRIWHPSHUDWXUHPRQLWRULQJUHTXLUHVSURSHULQVXODWLRQEHWZHHQEXVEDUVDQGWKHUPDO
switch.
VZLWFK
44 Cabinet construction

RFI filter
The RFI filter is used for improving the EMC characteristics of the unit. The RFI filter is not
„
suitable for use in IT (ungrounded) systems.
The following figure shows an example of installing RFI filter to the cabinet. For more
information about EMC requirements, see ACS880 multidrive cabinets and modules electrical
planning instructions (3AUA0000102324 [English]).
 Cabinet construction 45

Configuration overviews of the supply module cubicles

This section shows configuration examples of the supply module cubicles. You can build
larger units by combining the basic configurations. Frame D7T modules are used in 12-pulse
2×D7T configurations. Frame D8T modules are used in both 6- and 12-pulse single or
parallel configurations. You can supply the modules from either left or right, or from the
middle in the highest powers. See the alternative configurations in the figures.
The auxiliary cubicle (or inverter cubicles) are not shown here.
The values below each cubicle indicate the widths of the cubicles in millimeters.

￭ Configuration overviews – 6-pulse

Rittal VX25

1 1 1 1 1 2 1

D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T 10

400 600 400 600 600 XXX 600

1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1

D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T

400 600 XXX 600 400 600 XXX 400 600

1 Diode supply module cubicle

2 The incoming cubicle contains the power input cable terminals and switchgear. It is to be designed
by the customer.
46 Cabinet construction

Generic cabinets

1 1 1 1 2 1

D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T

XXX

400 600 800 600 600

1 2 1 1 2 1

D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T

800 XXX 600 800 XXX 800

1 Diode supply module cubicle

2 The incoming cubicle contains the power input cable terminals and switchgear. It is to be designed
by the customer.
 Cabinet construction 47

￭ Configuration overviews – 12-pulse

Rittal VX25

2 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 2

D7T D7T D7T D7T

D8T D8T D8T D8T

XXX 600 XXX 600 XXX XXX 600 XXX 600 XXX

2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2

10

D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T

XXX 600 600 XXX XXX 400 600 600 400 XXX

1 Diode supply module cubicle

2 The incoming cubicle contains the power input cable terminals and switchgear. It is to be designed
by the customer.
48 Cabinet construction

Generic cabinets

2 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 2

D7T D7T D7T D7T

D8T D8T D8T D8T

XXX 400 XXX 400 XXX XXX 600 XXX 600 XXX

2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2

D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T D8T

XXX 600 600 XXX XXX 800 800 XXX

1 Diode supply module cubicle

2 The incoming cubicle contains the power input cable terminals and switchgear. It is to be designed
by the customer.
 Cabinet construction 49

Layout drawings
„ drawing of the supply unit
￭ Layout
This is an example layout drawing of a supply unit with an auxiliary control cubicle, incoming
cubicle and supply module cubicle.

  






10



1 Auxiliary control cubicle. Contains control unit (BCU), and auxiliary control devices such as auxiliary
voltage transformer, circuit breakers, terminal blocks for the control wirings etc.
2 Incoming cubicle
3 Supply module cubicle
4 Input power cable connection point
5 PE busbar
6 Main switch-disconnector
7 Main AC fuses
8 Main contactor
9 Diode supply module
10 Diode supply module fan
11 Cooling fan in incoming cubicle (for AC fuses and other devices)
50 Cabinet construction

￭ Layout of supply module cubicle – 2×D7T, 12-pulse, in 600 mm wide

Rittal VX25 enclosure

2 2

1 AC input
2 D7T diode supply module
3 DC output
 Cabinet construction 51

￭ Layout of supply module cubicles – 1×D8T and 2×D8T, 6-pulse, in

400 mm / 600 mm wide Rittal VX25 enclosures

1 1 4
2 4 2 2

3 3 3
10

1 AC input
2 AC fuses (no fuses in 1×D8T cubicle when it is part of the 3×D8T design)
3 D8T diode supply module
4 DC output
52 Cabinet construction

￭ Layout of supply module cubicles – 2×D8T and 4×D8T, 12-pulse, in

600 mm wide Rittal VX25 enclosures

2×D8T 4×D8T

1 4 4
2 2

1 1

3 3 3 3 3 3

1 AC input
2 AC fuses
3 D8T diode supply module
4 DC output
 Cabinet construction 53

Installation examples
This section gives examples of how to place the drive and additional equipment into a Rittal
VX25 enclosure.
Each example includes a table that lists:
• installation stages of different equipment in the order in which the installation into the
enclosure should be done
• instruction code of the step-by-step instructions
• equipment kit code
• kit ordering code.
You can find the kit-specific assembly drawings, step-by-step instructions and kit information
on the Internet. Go to https://sites-apps.abb.com/sites/lvacdrivesengineeringsupport/content.
If needed, contact your local ABB representative.
The example includes also cabinet assembly drawings that show each stage listed in the
table. More detailed steps of each stage are described in the kit-specific assembly drawings.
The tightening torques are listed in the kit-specific assembly drawings. See the hardware
manual for the tightening torques of drive module input and output terminals.
For general instructions, see Drive modules cabinet design and construction instructions 10
(3AUA0000107668 [English]).

WARNING!
Remove the code labels attached to mechanical parts such as busbars,
shrouds and sheet metal parts before installation. They may cause bad
electrical connections, or, after peeling off and collecting dust in time,
cause arcing or block the cooling air flow.

￭ Construction of supply module cubicle – 2×D7T, 12-pulse, Rittal VX25

# Installation stage Instruction code Kit code Kit ordering code

1 Installation of common parts:
Baying parts 3AXD50000336340 - -
PE busbar [PE] 3AXD50000336104 - -
Divider panel 3AXD50000336692 - -
Bracket for Flat-PLS busbar 3AXD50000372782 A-468-X-011-VX 3AXD50000360772
holder (common AC)
Bracket for Flat-PLS busbar 3AXD50000333639 A-468-X-001-VX 3AXD50000333387
holder (common DC)
2 Module installation parts 3AXD50000426508 A-6-7-320-VX 3AXD50000427932
3 Module installation - - -
4 AC busbars to the module 3AXD50000431977 A-6-7-150-VX 3AXD50000427956
5 DC busbars 3AXD50000432707 - -
6 Shroud installation 3AXD50000335022 A-6-8-360-VX 3AXD50000337378
54 Cabinet construction

Kits for 2×D7T, 12-pulse, Rittal VX25

 Cabinet construction 55

Stage 1: Installation of common parts

10
56 Cabinet construction

Stage 2: Module installation parts

 Cabinet construction 57

Stage 3: Module installation

10
58 Cabinet construction

Stage 4: AC busbars to the module

 Cabinet construction 59

Stage 5: DC busbars to the module

10
60 Cabinet construction

Stage 6: Shroud installation

 Cabinet construction 61

￭ Construction of supply module cubicle – 1×D8T, 6-pulse, Rittal VX25

# Installation stage Instruction code Kit code Kit ordering code

1 Installation of common parts:
Baying parts 3AXD50000336340 - -
PE busbar [PE] 3AXD50000336104 - -
Divider panel 3AXD50000336692 - -
Bracket for Flat-PLS busbar 3AXD50000372782 A-468-X-011-VX 3AXD50000360772
holder (common AC)
Bracket for Flat-PLS busbar 3AXD50000333639 A-468-X-001-VX 3AXD50000333387
holder (common DC)
2 Module installation parts 3AXD50000372799 A-4-8-303-VX 3AXD50000371877
3 Quick connector installation 3AXD50000372799 A-468-8-100 3AUA0000119227
3AUA0000118667
4 DC busbars 3AXD50000373871 A-4-8-201-VX 3AXD50000371884
DC connection flanges A-468-8-230 3AXD50000002639
5 AC busbars to quick connector 3AXD500003379739 A-4-8-180-VX 3AXD50000371860
6 AC busbar installation 3AXD50000417247 A-4-8-102-VX 3AXD50000371853
7 Module installation 3AUA0000118641 - - 10
8 Shroud installation 3AXD50000335169 A-4-8-359-VX 3AXD50000337484
62 Cabinet construction

Kits for 1×D8T, 6-pulse, Rittal VX25

 Cabinet construction 63

Stage 1: Installation of common parts

10
64 Cabinet construction

Stage 2: Module installation parts

 Cabinet construction 65

Stage 3: Quick connector installation

10
66 Cabinet construction

Stage 4: DC busbars to the module

 Cabinet construction 67

Stage 5: AC busbars to quick connector

10
68 Cabinet construction

Stage 6: AC busbar
 Cabinet construction 69

Stage 7: Module installation

10
70 Cabinet construction

Stage 8: Shroud installation

 Cabinet construction 71

￭ Construction of supply module cubicle – 1×D8T, 6-pulse generic

cabinet
Parts to be installed Instruction code Kit code Kit ordering code
Module installation parts 3AXD50000002715 A-4-8-307 3AXD50000002716
AC busbars to quick connectors 3AXD50000006192 A-4-8-183 3AXD50000004849
Quick connectors 3AUA0000118667 A-468-8-100 3AUA0000119227
DC busbars 3AXD50000006191 A-4-8-209 3AXD50000004850
DC connection flanges 3AXD50000002638 A-468-8-230 3AXD50000002639

10
72 Cabinet construction

Kits for 1×D8T, 6-pulse generic cabinet

 Cabinet construction 73

￭ Construction of supply module cubicle – 2×D8T, 6-pulse, Rittal VX25

# Installation stage Instruction code Kit code Kit ordering code

1 Installation of common parts:
Baying parts 3AXD50000336340 - -
PE busbar [PE] 3AXD50000336104 - -
Divider panel 3AXD50000336692 - -
Bracket for Flat-PLS busbar 3AXD50000372782 A-468-X-011-VX 3AXD50000360772
holder (common AC)
Bracket for Flat-PLS busbar 3AXD50000333639 A-468-X-001-VX 3AXD50000333387
holder (common DC)
2 Module installation parts 3AXD50000422401 A-6-8-305-VX 3AXD50000422074
3 Quick connector installation 3AXD50000422401 A-468-8-100 3AUA0000119227
3AUA0000118667
4 DC busbars 3AXD50000430550 A-6-8-202-VX 3AXD50000422104
DC connection flanges A-468-8-230 3AXD50000002639
5 AC busbars to quick connector 3AXD50000430574 A-6-8-182-VX 3AXD50000422098
6 AC fuse busbars installation 3AXD50000431557 A-6-8-103-VX 3AXD50000422081
7 Module installation 3AUA0000118641 - - 10
8 Shroud installation 3AXD50000335022 A-6-8-354-VX 3AXD50000337378
74 Cabinet construction

Kits for 2×D8T, 6-pulse, Rittal VX25

 Cabinet construction 75

Stage 1: Installation of common parts

10
76 Cabinet construction

Stage 2: Module installation parts

 Cabinet construction 77

Stage 3: Quick connector installation

10
78 Cabinet construction

Stage 4: DC busbars
 Cabinet construction 79

Stage 5: AC busbars to quick connector

10
80 Cabinet construction

Stage 6: AC fuse busbars installation

 Cabinet construction 81

Stage 7: Module installation

10
82 Cabinet construction

Stage 8: Shroud installation

 Cabinet construction 83

￭ Construction of supply module cubicle – 2×D8T, 6- and 12-pulse,

generic cabinet
Parts to be installed Instruction code Kit code Kit ordering code
Module installation parts 3AXD50000006128 A-6-8-313 3AXD50000006135
AC busbars to quick connectors 3AXD50000006270 A-6-8-184 3AXD50000006136
Quick connectors 3AUA0000118667 A-468-8-100 3AUA0000119227
DC busbars 3AXD50000006281 A-6-8-210 3AXD50000006524
DC connection flanges 3AXD50000002638 A-468-8-230 3AXD50000002639

10
84 Cabinet construction

Kits for 2×D8T, 6- and 12-pulse, generic cabinet

 Cabinet construction 85

￭ Construction of supply module cubicle – 2×D8T, 12-pulse, Rittal VX25

# Installation stage Instruction code Kit code Kit ordering code

1 Installation of common parts:
Baying parts 3AXD50000336340 - -
PE busbar [PE] 3AXD50000336104 - -
Divider panel 3AXD50000336692 - -
Bracket for Flat-PLS busbar 3AXD50000372782 A-468-X-011-VX 3AXD50000360772
holder (common AC)
Bracket for Flat-PLS busbar 3AXD50000333639 A-468-X-001-VX 3AXD50000333387
holder (common DC)
2 Module installation parts 3AXD50000422401 A-6-8-305-VX 3AXD50000422074
3 Quick connector installation 3AXD50000422401 A-468-8-100 3AUA0000119227
3AXD50000001886
4 DC busbars 3AXD50000430550 A-6-8-202-VX 3AXD50000422104
DC connection flanges A-468-8-230 3AXD50000002639
5 AC busbars to quick connector 3AXD50000430574 A-6-8-182-VX 3AXD50000422098
6 AC busbars to main AC installa- 3AXD50000432417 A-6-8-105-VX 3AXD50000427918
tion
10
7 Module installation 3AUA0000118641 - -
DC connection flanges - A-468-8-230 3AXD50000002639
8 Shroud installation 3AXD50000355022 A-6-8-360-VX 3AXD50000337378
86 Cabinet construction

Kits for 2×D8T, 12-pulse, Rittal VX25

 Cabinet construction 87

Stage 1: Installation of common parts

10
88 Cabinet construction

Stage 2: Module installation parts

 Cabinet construction 89

Stage 3: Quick connectors

10
90 Cabinet construction

Stage 4: DC busbar installation

 Cabinet construction 91

Stage 5: AC busbars to quick connector

10
92 Cabinet construction

Stage 6: AC busbars to main AC installation

 Cabinet construction 93

Stage 7: Module installation, DC connection flanges

10
94 Cabinet construction

Stage 8: Shroud installation

 Cabinet construction 95

￭ Construction of supply module cubicle – 3×D8T, 6-pulse, generic

cabinet
Parts to be installed Instruction code Kit code Kit ordering code
Module installation parts 3AXD50000006142 A-8-8-314 3AXD50000006517
AC busbars to quick connectors 3AXD50000006272 A-8-8-185 3AXD50000006514
Quick connectors 3AUA0000118667 A-468-8-100 3AUA0000119227
DC busbars 3AXD50000006284 A-8-8-211 3AXD50000006516
DC connection flanges 3AXD50000002638 A-468-8-230 3AXD50000002639

10
96 Cabinet construction

Kits for 3×D8T, 6-pulse, generic cabinet

 Electrical installation 97

5
Electrical installation

Contents of this chapter

This chapter describes the electrical installation of the modules. 11
The wiring diagrams in this chapter are simplified presentations. For details, see the example
circuit diagrams included in the manual.
Note: The instructions do not cover all possible cabinet constructions.
For more information on electrical installation, see ACS880 multidrive cabinets and modules
electrical planning instructions (3AUA0000102324 [English]).

Safety and liability

WARNING!
Only qualified electrical professionals are allowed to do the work described in this
chapter. Read the complete safety instructions before you install, commission,
use or service the drive. The complete safety instructions are given in ACS880
multidrive cabinets and modules safety instructions (3AUA0000102301 [English]).

Note: The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable local
laws and regulations. ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any installation
which breaches the local laws and/or other regulations. Furthermore, if the recommendations
given by ABB are not followed, the drive system may experience problems that the warranty
does not cover.
98 Electrical installation

Electrical safety precautions

These electrical safety precautions are for all personnel who do work on the drive, motor
cable or motor.

WARNING!
Obey these instructions. If you ignore them, injury or death, or damage to the
equipment can occur.
If you are not a qualified electrical professional, do not do installation or
maintenance work.
Go through these steps before you begin any installation or maintenance work.

1. Clearly identify the work location and equipment.

2. Disconnect all possible voltage sources. Make sure that re-connection is not possible.
Lock out and tag out.
• Open the main disconnecting device of the drive.
• Open the charging switch if present.
• Open the disconnector of the supply transformer. (The main disconnecting device
in the drive cabinet does not disconnect the voltage from the AC input power
busbars of the drive cabinet.)
• If the drive is equipped with a DC/DC converter unit (optional) or a DC feeder unit
(optional): Open the DC switch-disconnector [Q11] of the unit. Open the
disconnecting device of the energy storage connected to the unit (outside the drive
cabinet).
• Open the auxiliary voltage switch-disconnector (if present), and all other possible
disconnecting devices that isolate the drive from dangerous voltage sources.
• If you have a permanent magnet motor connected to the drive, disconnect the
motor from the drive with a safety switch or by other means.
• Disconnect all dangerous external voltages from the control circuits.
• After you disconnect power from the drive, always wait 5 minutes to let the
intermediate circuit capacitors discharge before you continue.
3. Protect any other energized parts in the work location against contact.
4. Take special precautions when close to bare conductors.
5. Measure that the installation is de-energized. Use a quality voltage tester. If the
measurement requires removal or disassembly of shrouding or other cabinet structures,
obey the local laws and regulations applicable to live working (including – but not limited
to – electric shock and arc protection).
• Before and after measuring the installation, verify the operation of the voltage tester
on a known voltage source.
• Make sure that the voltage between the drive input power terminals (L1, L2, L3)
and the grounding (PE) busbar is zero.
• Make sure that the voltage between the drive output terminals (T1/U, T2/V, T3/W)
and the grounding (PE) busbar is zero.
Important! Repeat the measurement also with the DC voltage setting of the tester.
Measure between each phase and ground. There is a risk of dangerous DC voltage
 Electrical installation 99

charging due to leakage capacitances of the motor circuit. This voltage can remain
charged for a long time after the drive power-off. The measurement discharges the
voltage.
• Make sure that the voltage between the drive DC terminals (UDC+ and UDC-) and
the grounding (PE) terminal is zero. In cabinet-built drives, measure between the
drive DC busbars (+ and -) and the grounding (PE) busbar.
6. Install temporary grounding as required by the local regulations.
7. Ask for a permit to work from the person in control of the electrical installation work.

General notes
WARNING!
Use a grounding wristband when you handle printed circuit boards. Do not touch
the boards unnecessarily. The boards contain components sensitive to electrostatic
discharge.

￭ Optical components

WARNING!
Obey these instructions. If you ignore them, damage to the equipment can occur.

• Handle the fiber optic cables with care. 11

• When you unplug the fiber optic cables, always hold the connector, not the cable itself.
• Do not touch the ends of the fibers with bare hands as the ends are extremely sensitive
to dirt.
• Do not bend the fiber optic cables too tightly. The minimum allowed bend radius is
35 mm (1.4 in).

Checking the insulation of the assembly

￭ Measuring the insulation resistance of the drive

WARNING!
Do not do any voltage withstand or insulation resistance tests on any part of the
drive as testing can damage the drive. Every drive has been tested for insulation
between the main circuit and the chassis at the factory. Also, there are
voltage-limiting circuits inside the drive which cut down the testing voltage
automatically.

￭ Measuring the insulation resistance of the input power cable

Before you connect the input power cable to the drive, measure its insulation resistance
according to local regulations.

Checking the compatibility with IT (ungrounded) systems

The RFI filter is not suitable for use in IT (ungrounded) systems.
 100 Electrical installation

WARNING!
If a drive with an RFI filter is installed on an IT system (an ungrounded power
system), the system will be connected to earth potential through the filter capacitors
of the drive. This can cause danger, or damage the unit.

Connecting the power cables and busbars

The connection diagrams in this section are templates for the final main circuit diagrams.
They do not contain details, such as terminal markings, etc. and are not suitable for the
installation work as such. The designer of the cabinet-installed drive must:
• prepare the final circuit diagrams
• provide the final circuit diagrams to the installer(s).
The electricians that do the connections must use the final circuit diagrams.
„
￭ Connection diagram – 1×D8T, 6-pulse



 2 2 2

° 



;° <° =


6+

1) Fuses or other protection means.

2) Groundthe cable shield 360 degrees at the cable entry (recommendation). See section
Connection procedure (page 104).
3) Use a separate PE conductor in addition to the input cable shield if the conductivity of the
shield does not meet the requirement for the PE conductor. See ACS880 multidrive cabinets
and modules electrical planning instructions (3AUA0000102324 [English]).
 Electrical installation 101

4) The supply modules and other components connect to the cabinet grounding point [PE]
via their mounting bases and frame of the cabinet. Make sure that there are good electrical
contacts (bare metal to metal, no paint or dirt). Use separate grounding wires in addition
where necessary. See section Connection procedure (page 104).
Note: For the cable selection instructions, see ACS880 multidrive cabinets and modules
electrical planning instructions (3AUA0000102324 [English]).
„
￭ Connection diagram – 2×D8T, 6-pulse



2 2 2


° 
° 

;° <° = ;° <° =

11

6+ 6+

1) Fuses or other protection means.

2) Groundthe cable shield 360 degrees at the cable entry (recommendation). See section
Connection procedure (page 104).
3) Use a separate PE conductor in addition to the input cable shield if the conductivity of the
shield does not meet the requirement for the PE conductor. See ACS880 multidrive cabinets
and modules electrical planning instructions (3AUA0000102324 [English]).
4) The supply modules and other components connect to the cabinet grounding point [PE]
via their mounting bases and frame of the cabinet. Make sure that there are good electrical
contacts (bare metal to metal, no paint or dirt). Use separate grounding wires in addition
where necessary. See section Connection procedure (page 104).
Note: For the cable selection instructions, see ACS880 multidrive cabinets and modules
electrical planning instructions (3AUA0000102324 [English]).
102 Electrical installation

„
￭ Connection diagram – 3×D8T, 6-pulse



2 2 2


° 
° 
° 



;° <° = ;° <° = ;° <° =

6+


1) Fuses or other protection means.

2) Groundthe cable shield 360 degrees at the cable entry (recommendation). See section
Connection procedure (page 104).
3) Use a separate PE conductor in addition to the input cable shield if the conductivity of the
shield does not meet the requirement for the PE conductor. See ACS880 multidrive cabinets
and modules electrical planning instructions (3AUA0000102324 [English]).
4) The supply modules and other components connect to the cabinet grounding point [PE]
via their mounting bases and frame of the cabinet. Make sure that there are good electrical
contacts (bare metal to metal, no paint or dirt). Use separate grounding wires in addition
where necessary. See section Connection procedure (page 104).
Note: For the cable selection instructions, see ACS880 multidrive cabinets and modules
electrical planning instructions (3AUA0000102324 [English]).
 Electrical installation 103

„
￭ Connection diagram – 2×D8T, 12-pulse




2
2
2

2
2

2

° 
° °

;° <° = ;° <° =

6+ 6+

11


1) Fuses or other protection means.

2) Groundthe cable shield 360 degrees at the cable entry (recommendation). See section
Connection procedure (page 104).
3) Use a separate PE conductor in addition to the input cable shield if the conductivity of the
shield does not meet the requirement for the PE conductor. See ACS880 multidrive cabinets
and modules electrical planning instructions (3AUA0000102324 [English]).
4) The supply modules and other components connect to the cabinet grounding point [PE]
via their mounting bases and frame of the cabinet. Make sure that there are good electrical
contacts (bare metal to metal, no paint or dirt). Use separate grounding wires in addition
where necessary. See section Connection procedure (page 104).
Note: For the cable selection instructions, see ACS880 multidrive cabinets and modules
electrical planning instructions (3AUA0000102324 [English]).
104 Electrical installation

￭ Connection procedure

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions given in ACS880 multidrive cabinets and
modules safety instructions (3AUA0000102301 [English]). If you ignore
the safety instructions, injury or death, or damage to the equipment can
occur.
If you are not a qualified electrical professional, do not do installation or
maintenance work.

WARNING!
Apply grease to stripped aluminum conductors before attaching them to non-coated
aluminum cable lugs. Obey the grease manufacturer’s instructions.
Aluminum-aluminum contact can cause oxidation in the contact surfaces.

1. Disconnect the drive from the AC power line and make sure it is safe to start the work.
Obey the instructions in section Electrical safety precautions (page 98).
2. Make the connections in between the main circuit components inside the cabinet if not
done yet. Do the connections according to the final circuit diagrams for the drive. If the
connections are ready, check them against the final circuit diagrams. Do not use the
example circuit diagrams in this manual as the sole source of information when doing
or checking the connections.
For the tightening torques, see section Tightening torques (page 237).
3. Ground the modules by the top edge of the front plate. The grounding point is marked
on the module (a). Connect the front plate to the frame support bracket (b) with screws.
The frame support bracket should have a galvanic connection to the PE busbar through
the cabinet frame.
Note: If the cabinet frame is painted (for example, Rittal VX25 enclosures), it is important
to make sure that a good galvanic connection to ground (PE busbar) is achieved. You
can, for example, remove the paint from the connection points and use star washers.
Note: The connection to ground merely through the mounting screws and the cabinet
chassis is not always good enough. To ensure the continuity of the protective bonding
circuit, you can connect the modules to the cabinet PE busbar with a copper busbar or
cable. The inductance and impedance of the PE conductor must be rated according to
permissible touch voltage appearing under fault conditions (so that the fault point voltage
will not rise excessively when a ground fault occurs). See ACS880 multidrive cabinets
and modules electrical planning instructions (3AUA0000102324 [English]).
4. Lead the input power cables into the inside of the cabinet.
5. Strip the input power cables and twist the cable shields to bundles and connect to
cabinet PE (ground) busbar. Connect the separate ground conductors/cables to cabinet
PE (ground) busbar. ABB recommends also 360° grounding of the cable shield at the
lead-through to suppress interference. See the illustration below.
6. Connect the phase conductors to the input terminals of the main switch-disconnector
[Q1] or the main breaker [Q1]. For the tightening torque, see section Tightening
torques (page 237).
 Electrical installation 105

3
a

11

A cable entry example. This is to be acquired by the

cabinet installer. 50%
106 Electrical installation

Connecting auxiliary power to the diode supply module

The cabinet builder can arrange an auxiliary AC power supply of 230 V AC (or 115 V AC
with option +G304) to connector X50 to power the electronics of each supply module. There
is an internal power supply (BDPS) in the module that produces 24 V DC from the auxiliary
voltage for the internal circuit boards.
If a direct-on-line fan (option +C188) is used, the user must connect the fan supply to the
module control connector X50. The optional heating element (D8T option +C183) also
requires external AC power supply to the module control connector X50.
For connectors X50, see Connectors X50 and X53 of D7T supply module (page 30) and
Connectors X50 and X53 of D8T supply module (page 32).
The plug connector is available from ABB. See section Control circuit plug connectors for
supply modules (page 188). See also section Auxiliary circuit current/power
consumption (page 233).

￭ Connection procedure

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions given in ACS880 multidrive cabinets and
modules safety instructions (3AUA0000102301 [English]). If you ignore
the safety instructions, injury or death, or damage to the equipment can
occur.
If you are not a qualified electrical professional, do not do installation or
maintenance work.

1. Disconnect the drive from the AC power line and make sure it is safe to start the work.
Obey the instructions in section Electrical safety precautions (page 98).
2. Route the cable. Obey the general routing guidelines in section Connecting the control
cables (page 107).
3. Connect the cable from the auxiliary power supply to plug connector X50.
4. Plug connector X50 to its counterpart in the module.

Connecting power supply for the control unit

The cabinet builder must connect a 24 V DC auxiliary power supply for the BCU control
unit. The cabinet builder can take the power supply from the diode supply module or use
another power source.
Note: It is not allowed to use the 24 V DC output on terminal X53 for any other purpose
than for powering the BCU control unit. See Connectors X50 and X53 of D7T supply
module (page 30) and Connectors X50 and X53 of D8T supply module (page 32).
See also chapter The control unit (page 243) and sections Auxiliary circuit current/power
consumption (page 233).
The plug connector is available from ABB. See section Control circuit plug connectors for
supply modules (page 188).
 Electrical installation 107

￭ Connection procedure

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions given in ACS880 multidrive cabinets and
modules safety instructions (3AUA0000102301 [English]). If you ignore
the safety instructions, injury or death, or damage to the equipment can
occur.
If you are not a qualified electrical professional, do not do installation or
maintenance work.

1. Disconnect the drive from the AC power line and make sure it is safe to start the work.
Obey the instructions in section Electrical safety precautions (page 98).
2. Route the cable. Obey the general routing guidelines in section Connecting the control
cables (page 107).
3. Connect the power supply cable:
• Connect the other end of the cable to terminal XPOW on control unit.
• Connect the other end of the cable to the power source. If you take the power
supply from diode supply module, install the plug connector X53 of the supply
module and plug the connector X53 to its counterpart on the front plate of the
module.

Connecting the control cables 11

￭ Connection diagram
Connect the internal control cabling of the supply unit according to the circuit diagrams
provided by the designer of the cabinet-installed drive.

￭ Connection procedure
This section contains instructions on how to connect external control cables to the supply
unit.

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions given in ACS880 multidrive cabinets and
modules safety instructions (3AUA0000102301 [English]). If you ignore
the safety instructions, injury or death, or damage to the equipment can
occur.
If you are not a qualified electrical professional, do not do installation or
maintenance work.

1. Disconnect the drive from the AC power line and make sure it is safe to start the work.
Obey the instructions in section Electrical safety precautions (page 98).
2. Open the door of the cabinet and remove the shrouds (if any).
3. Run the external control cables into the inside of the cabinet through a cable gland or
grommet.
 „

108 Electrical installation

• 360 degree grounding of the cable shield is recommended to suppress interference.

In case a grounding cable gland is available, remove the outer jacket of the cable
where it passes through the cable gland.
• Seal the cable entry with a grommet.
4. Run the cables to the appropriate terminals. Wherever possible:
• Use the existing cable trunking in the cabinet.
• Use sleeving wherever the cables are laid against sharp edges.
• Tie the cables to provide strain relief.
5. Cut the cables to suitable length. Strip the cables and conductors.
6. Twist the cable shields into bundles and connect them to the ground terminal nearest
to the terminal block. Keep the unshielded portion of the cables as short as possible.
7. Connect the conductors to appropriate terminals. For the tightening torques of the BCU
control unit I/O terminals, see section Default I/O diagram of the supply control
unit (page 246).
8. Fasten the shrouds (if any) and close the doors.

An example control cable entry with 360 degrees grounding of the cable shields. To be acquired by the
cabinet-installer.

￭ Connecting a PC

WARNING!
Do not connect the PC directly to the control panel connector of the control unit
as this can cause damage.
 Electrical installation 109

A PC (with eg, the Drive composer PC tool) can be connected as follows:

1. Connect a ACS-AP-… or ACH-AP-… control panel to the unit either
• by inserting the control panel into the panel holder or platform, or
• by using an Ethernet (eg, Cat 5e) networking cable.
2. Remove the USB connector cover on the front of the control panel.
3. Connect an USB cable (Type A to Type Mini-B) between the USB connector on the
control panel (3a) and a free USB port on the PC (3b).
4. The panel will display an indication whenever the connection is active.
5. See the documentation of the PC tool for setup instructions.

USB connected 4
2
?

Stop Loc/Rem Start

Stop Loc/Rem Start

2 3a 3b

11
110 Electrical installation

￭ Installing option modules

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions of the drive. If you ignore them, injury or death,
or damage to the equipment can occur.

Pay attention to the free space required by the cabling or terminals coming to the option
modules.
1. Repeat the steps described in Electrical safety precautions (page 98).
2. Pull out the lock (a).
Note: The location of the lock depends on the module type.
3. Install the module to a free option module slot on the control unit.
4. Push in the lock (a).
5. Tighten the grounding screw (b) to a torque of 0.8 N·m (7 lbf·in).
Note: The screw tightens the connections and grounds the module. It is essential for
fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation of the module.

WARNING!
Do not use excessive force, or leave the screw too loose. Over-tightening can
damage the screw or module. A loose screw can cause an operation failure.

6. Connect the wiring to the module. Obey the instructions given in the documentation of
the module.
 Installation checklist 111

6
Installation checklist

Contents of this chapter

This chapter contains a checklist of the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive.

Checklist
Examine the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive before start-up. Go through
the checklist together with another person.

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions of the drive. If you ignore them, injury or death,
or damage to the equipment can occur. If you are not a qualified electrical
professional, do not do installation, commissioning or maintenance work.

WARNING!
Stop the drive and do the steps in section Electrical safety precautions (page 98)
before you start the work.

Make sure that …

The ambient operating conditions meet the drive ambient conditions specification and enclosure rating
(IP code ).
The supply voltage matches the nominal input voltage of the drive. See the type designation label.
The insulation resistance of the input power cable, motor cable and motor is measured according to
local regulations and the manuals of the drive.
The drive cabinet is attached to the floor, and if necessary due to vibration etc, also by its top to the
wall or roof.
The drive module is fastened properly to the enclosure.
112 Installation checklist

Make sure that …

The cooling air flows freely in and out of the drive. Air recirculation inside the cabinet is not possible
(air baffle plates are on place, or there is another air guiding solution).
If the drive is connected to a network other than a symmetrically grounded TN-S system: You have
done all the required modifications (for example, you may need to disconnect the EMC filter or ground-
to-phase varistor). See the electrical installation instructions in the supply unit manual.
The enclosures of the equipment in the cabinet have proper galvanic connection to the cabinet protective
earth (ground) busbar; The connection surfaces at the fastening points are bare (unpainted) and the
connections are tight, or separate grounding conductors have been installed.
The main circuit connections inside the drive cabinet correspond to the circuit diagrams.
The control unit has been connected. See the circuit diagrams.
Appropriate AC fuses and main disconnecting device are installed.
There is an adequately sized protective earth (ground) conductor(s) between the drive and the
switchboard, the conductor is connected to correct terminal, and the terminal is tightened to the correct
torque.
Proper grounding has also been measured according to the regulations.
If the drive is equipped with a DC/DC converter unit: There is an adequately sized protective earth
(ground) conductor between the energy storage and the DC/DC converter, the conductor has been
connected to appropriate terminal, and the terminal has been tightened to the proper torque. Proper
grounding has also been measured according to the regulations.
If the drive is equipped with a DC/DC converter unit: The energy storage cable has been connected to
the correct terminals of the DC/DC converter and energy storage, and the terminals have been tightened
to the proper torque.
If the drive is equipped with a DC/DC converter unit: The energy storage has been equipped with fuses
for protecting energy storage cable in a cable short-circuit situation.
If the drive is equipped with a DC/DC converter unit: The energy storage has been equipped with a
disconnecting device.
The input power cable is connected to the correct terminals, the phase order is correct, and the terminals
are tightened to the correct torque.
There is an adequately sized protective earth (ground) conductor between the motor and the drive,
and the conductor is connected to the correct terminal, and the terminal is tightened to the correct
torque.
Proper grounding has also been measured according to the regulations.
The motor cable is connected to the correct terminals, the phase order is correct, and the terminals
are tightened to the correct torque.
The motor cable is routed away from other cables.
No power factor compensation capacitors are connected to the motor cable.
If an external brake resistor is connected to the drive: There is an adequately sized protective earth
(ground) conductor between the brake resistor and the drive, and the conductor is connected to the
correct terminal, and the terminals are tightened to the correct torque. Proper grounding has also been
measured according to the regulations.
If an external brake resistor is connected to the drive: The brake resistor cable is connected to the
correct terminals, and the terminals are tightened to the correct torque.
If an external brake resistor is connected to the drive: The brake resistor cable is routed away from
other cables.
The control cables are connected to the correct terminals, and the terminals are tightened to the correct
torque.
If a drive bypass connection will be used: The Direct On Line contactor of the motor and the drive output
contactor are either mechanically and/or electrically interlocked, that is, they cannot be closed at the
same time. A thermal overload device must be used for protection when bypassing the drive. Refer to
local codes and regulations.
There are no tools, foreign objects or dust from drilling inside the drive.
 Installation checklist 113

Make sure that …

The area in front of the drive is clean: the drive cooling fan cannot draw any dust or dirt inside.
Cover(s) of the motor connection box are in place. Cabinet shrouds are in place and doors are closed.
The motor and the driven equipment are ready for power-up.
114
 Start-up 115

7
Start-up

Contents of this chapter

This chapter contains start-up instructions of the diode supply unit.
The underlined tasks are necessary only for certain cases. The symbols in brackets, for
example [Q1], refer to the item designations used in the circuit diagrams. If a task is valid
only for a certain option device or feature, the option code is given in brackets.
12
Note: The instructions do not cover all possible supply unit configurations.
Note: The start-up instructions for functional safety features are not given in this chapter.
The designer of the cabinet-installed drive is responsible for the instructions of testing the
functional safety systems.

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions during the start-up procedure. See ACS880
multidrive cabinets and modules safety instructions (3AUA0000102301
[English]). If you ignore the safety instructions, injury or death, or damage
to the equipment can occur.
If you are not a qualified electrical professional, do not do installation or
maintenance work.

WARNING!
Before you activate the automatic fault reset or automatic restart functions of the
drive control program, make sure that no dangerous situations can occur. These
functions reset the drive automatically and continue operation after a fault or supply
break. If these functions are activated, the installation must be clearly marked as
defined in IEC/EN 61800-5-1, subclause 6.5.3, for example, “THIS MACHINE
STARTS AUTOMATICALLY”. If you select an external source for the start command
and it is on, the drive will start immediately after fault reset. See the firmware
manual.
116 Start-up

Start-up procedure
￭ Basic checks with no voltage connected

Action

Disconnect the drive from the AC power line and make sure it is safe to start the work. See section
Electrical safety precautions (page 98).

Disconnect all dangerous voltages from the drive and make sure that it is safe to start the work. Do
the steps in section Electrical safety precautions (page 98).

If the supply unit is equipped with a main switch-disconnector [Q1] and contactor [Q2]: Open first the
main contactor, and then the main switch-disconnector.

If the supply unit is equipped with a main breaker [Q1]: Set the current trip limits of the main breaker.
The trip limits have been preset to generic values by the breaker manufacturer. The generic limits do
not correspond the protection requirements of the application.
General rule
Make sure that the selectivity condition is fulfilled, that is the breaker trips at the lower current than the
protection device of the supplying network, and that the limit is high enough to cause unnecessary
trips during the intermediate DC circuit load peak at start.
Long term current limit
Rule of thumb: Set to the rated AC current of the drive.
Peak current limit
Rule of thumb: Set to a value 3…4 times the rated AC current of the drive.

Make sure that the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive is completed. See Installation
checklist (page 111).

Check the settings of breakers/switches in the auxiliary circuits.

If time relays, or relays with delayed make-contact or break-contact are used, for example, in emergency
stop circuits, check the relay time settings. See the delivery-specific circuit diagrams and safety function
specific documentation (if applicable).

Make sure that the voltage settings of the auxiliary voltage transformers are according to the actual
power line voltage. See the final circuit diagrams by the designer of the cabinet-installed drive.

￭ Connecting voltage to input terminals and auxiliary

Action

Remove the temporary grounding system (if installed).

Close the circuit breakers supplying the auxiliary circuits.

Close the cabinet doors.

Make sure that it is safe to connect voltage:

• nobody is working on the unit or circuits that are wired from outside into the cabinets
• covers of the motor terminal boxes are on
• cabinet doors are closed
• the disconnecting device [Q1] is open.

Close the main breaker of the supply transformer.

 Start-up 117

￭ Setting the supply unit parameters

Action

Supply modules with option +C188 (direct-on-line cooling fan): Set bit 13 of parameter 195.20 HW
options word 1.

If the supply unit includes one supply module:

• Check the correct voltage ranges by parameter 195.01 Supply voltage.
• Reboot the control unit by parameter 196.08 Control board boot.
If the supply unit includes more than one supply module: Make sure that the value of parameter 195.31
Parallel connection rating id corresponds to the actual number of parallel-connected diode supply
modules:
• Select the correct voltage range with parameter 195.30 Parallel type filter.
• Select the correct supply unit type with parameter 195.31 Parallel connection rating id.
• Reboot the control unit by parameter 196.08 Control board boot.
• Check the correct voltage range, parameter 195.01 Supply voltage.
• Reboot the control unit by parameter 196.08 Control board boot.
If you need more information on the use of the control panel, see ACX-AP-x assistant control panels
user's manual (3AUA0000085685 [English]).

Switch the control panel to the remote mode (Loc/Rem key) to enable control of the supply unit with
the operating switch [S21].

￭ Powering up the drive

Action

Drive with main breaker [Q1]: Unlock the withdrawn breaker, and crank it in.

WARNING!
Never use the start button of the air circuit breaker to close it. Start button bypasses charging
circuit and may damage the module.
12
Drive with main switch-disconnector [Q1]: Unlock the main switch-disconnector, and close it.

WARNING!
Do not use excessive force. If the unit is equipped with a grounding switch [Q9], electromag-
netic interlocking is also used. You cannot switch the main switch-disconnector [Q1] before
its lock release relay [K1] is energized, that is:
• the main input terminals [L1, L2 and L3] are powered, and
• grounding switch [Q9] is switched off, and
• auxiliary voltage switch [Q21] is switched on, and
• circuit breakers [F22, F23] in between the relay [K1] and auxiliary voltage switch [Q21] are
switched on.

Drive with brake chopper: Make sure that there are inverters connected to the DC bus before closing
the main contactor. A rule of thumb: The sum capacitance of the inverters connected to the DC bus
of the drive must be at least 50% of the sum capacitance of all inverters of the drive.
If there is not enough capacitive load at start, the DC voltage can exceed the overvoltage limit, causing
immediate start of the brake unit and continuous supply for it by the supply unit. Continuous braking
will overload brake choppers and resistors and cause overheating.

Turn the operating switch [S21] to on (1) position to activate the Run enable signal and to close the
main contactor [Q2] / main breaker [Q1].
118 Start-up

￭ Safety function validation

Action

Validate the operation of safety functions (for example, emergency stop).

WARNING!
The safety functions are not safe before they are validated according to the instructions.
See the function-specific manual for the validation tasks.

Safety functions are optional. See the function-specific manual for the validation tasks.

￭ On-load checks

Action

Make sure that the supply module cooling fan [G41] rotates freely in the right direction.

Switching the supply unit off

1. Stop the motors connected to inverter units.
2. Turn the operating switch [S21] to the OFF (0) position to deactivate the Run enable
signal and to switch off the main disconnecting device (main contactor [Q2]/ main
breaker [Q1]).

ENABLE / RUN
0-1

Disconnecting and temporary grounding the drive

See Electrical safety precautions (page 98).
 Maintenance 119

8
Maintenance

Contents of this chapter

This chapter contains the maintenance instructions.

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions given in ACS880 multidrive cabinets and
modules safety instructions (3AUA0000102301 [English]). If you ignore
the safety instructions, injury or death, or damage to the equipment can
occur.
If you are not a qualified electrical professional, do not do installation or
maintenance work.

Maintenance intervals
The tables below show the maintenance tasks which can be done by the end user. The
complete maintenance schedule is available on the Internet
(https://new.abb.com/drives/services/maintenance/preventive-maintenance). For more
information, consult your local ABB Service representative (www.abb.com/searchchannels).

￭ Description of symbols

Action Description

I Inspection (visual inspection and maintenance action if needed)

P Performance of on/off-site work (commissioning, tests, measurements or other work)

R Replacement
120 Maintenance

￭ Recommended maintenance intervals after start-up

Years from start-up

Maintenance task / object
1 2 3 … 6 … 9 … 12 … 15 … 18 …
Cooling fans
Main cooling fan (D7T speed- R R
controlled)
Main cooling fan (D8T speed- R R
controlled)
Main cooling fan (D7T DOL R R
50 Hz)
Main cooling fan (D7T DOL R R
60 Hz)
Main cooling fan (D8T DOL R R
50 Hz)
Internal cooling fan for circuit R R
boards (D8T)
Cabinet cooling fan, internal, R R
50 Hz
Cabinet cooling fan, internal R R R
60 Hz
Cabinet cooling fan, roof (IP54), R R
50 Hz
Cabinet cooling fan, roof (IP54), R R R
60 Hz
Batteries
Control unit BCU battery R R R
Control panel battery R R
Connections and environment
Cabinet door filters (IP54) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
Quality of supply voltage P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
Spare parts
Spare part stock I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Other useful tasks
Cleaning IP42 air inlet and outlet I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
meshes
Checking tightness of cable and I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
busbar terminals. Tightening if
needed.
Checking ambient conditions I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
(dustiness, corrosion, temperat-
ure)
Heat sink cleaning I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
ABB-SACE main circuit breaker I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
maintenance
Functional safety
Safety function test I
See the maintenance information of the safety function.
 Maintenance 121

Years from start-up

Maintenance task / object
1 2 3 … 6 … 9 … 12 … 15 … 18 …
Safety component expiry (Mission 20 years
time, TM)

Note:
• Maintenance and component replacement intervals are based on the assumption that
the equipment is operated within the specified ratings and ambient conditions. ABB
recommends annual drive inspections to ensure the highest reliability and optimum
performance.
• Long term operation near the specified maximum ratings or ambient conditions may
require shorter maintenance intervals for certain components. Consult your local ABB
Service representative for additional maintenance recommendations.

Cabinet
￭ Cleaning the interior of the cabinet

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions of the drive. If you ignore them, injury or death,
or damage to the equipment can occur. If you are not a qualified electrical
professional, do not do installation, commissioning or maintenance work.

WARNING!
Use a vacuum cleaner with antistatic hose and nozzle, and wear a grounding
wristband. Using a normal vacuum cleaner creates static discharges which can
damage circuit boards.

1. Stop the drive and do the steps in section Electrical safety precautions (page 98) before
you start the work.
2. Open the cabinet door.
3. Clean the interior of the cabinet. Use a vacuum cleaner and a soft brush.
4. Clean the air inlets of the fans and air outlets of the modules (top).
5. Clean the air inlet gratings (if any) on the door.
6. Close the door.
122 Maintenance

￭ Cleaning the door air inlets (IP22 and IP42)

Check the dustiness of the air inlet meshes. If the dust cannot be removed by vacuum
cleaning from outside through the grating holes with a small nozzle, proceed as follows:
1. Stop the drive and do the steps in section Electrical safety precautions (page 98) before
you start the work.
„
2. Remove the fasteners at the top of the grating.
3. Lift the grating and pull it away from the door.
4. Vacuum clean or wash the grating on both sides.
5. Reinstall the grating in reverse order.
 Maintenance 123

￭ Replacing the inlet door filters (IP54)

1. Stop the drive and do the steps in section Electrical safety precautions (page 98) before
„ you start the work.
2. Remove the fasteners at the top of the grating.
3. Lift the grating and pull it away from the door.
4. Remove the air filter mat.
5. Place the new filter mat in the grating the metal wire side facing the door.
6. Reinstall the grating in reverse order.

„
￭ Cleaning the roof outlet filters (IP54)
The outlet filters on the roof of IP54 units can be accessed by pulling the gratings upwards.
„
124 Maintenance

Power connections
￭ Retightening the power connections

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions of the drive. If you ignore them, injury or death,
or damage to the equipment can occur. If you are not a qualified electrical
professional, do not do installation, commissioning or maintenance work.

1. Stop the drive and do the steps in section Electrical safety precautions (page 98) before
you start the work.
2. Examine the tightness of the cable connections. Use the tightening torques given in
the technical data.

Fuses
￭ Checking and replacing the DC fuses of a D7T supply module

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions given in ACS880 multidrive cabinets and
modules safety instructions (3AUA0000102301 [English]). If you ignore
the safety instructions, injury or death, or damage to the equipment can
occur.
If you are not a qualified electrical professional, do not do installation or
maintenance work.

WARNING!
Use the required personal protective equipment. Wear protective gloves and long
sleeves. Some parts have sharp edges.

1. Disconnect the drive from the AC power line and make sure it is safe to start the work.
See section Electrical safety precautions (page 98).
2. Undo the screws of the cover panel of the module’s DC fuses and lift and remove the
panel.
3. Check the condition of the fuses and replace if necessary.
4. To replace a fuse, remove two M10×20 (17 mm) bolts which connect the DC fuse to
the DC busbar.
5. When you replace the fuse, make sure that the possible fuse indicators point to the
module to prevent a short circuit or earth fault with the cover plate.
6. Tighten two M10×20 (17 mm) bolts to 42 N·m to attach the fuse.
7. Attach the cover and close the door.
 Maintenance 125

￭ Checking and replacing the DC fuses of a D8T supply module

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions given in ACS880 multidrive cabinets and
modules safety instructions (3AUA0000102301 [English]). If you ignore
the safety instructions, injury or death, or damage to the equipment can
occur.
If you are not a qualified electrical professional, do not do installation or
maintenance work.

WARNING!
Use the required personal protective equipment. Wear protective gloves and long
sleeves. Some parts have sharp edges.

1. Disconnect the drive from the AC power line and make sure it is safe to start the work.
See section Electrical safety precautions (page 98).
2. Undo the screws of the cover panel of the module’s DC fuses and lift and remove the
panel.
3. Check the condition of the fuses and replace if necessary.
4. To replace a fuse, remove two M10×20 (17 mm) bolts which connect the DC fuse to
the DC busbar.
5. When you replace the fuse, make sure that the possible fuse indicators point to the
module to prevent a short circuit or earth fault with the cover plate.
126 Maintenance

6. Tighten two M10×20 (17 mm) bolts to 42 N·m to attach the fuse.
7. Attach the cover and close the door.

Without options +C129 and +C134

 Maintenance 127

With options +C129 and +C134

￭ Checking and replacing the AC fuses

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions given in ACS880 multidrive cabinets and
modules safety instructions (3AUA0000102301 [English]). If you ignore
the safety instructions, injury or death, or damage to the equipment can
occur.
If you are not a qualified electrical professional, do not do installation or
maintenance work.

WARNING!
Use the required personal protective equipment. Wear protective gloves and long
sleeves. Some parts have sharp edges.

1. Disconnect the drive from the AC power line and make sure it is safe to start the work.
See section Electrical safety precautions (page 98).
2. Open the door of the cubicle(s) in which the fuses are.
3. Remove the shrouding (a) from in front of the fuses.
4. Slacken the nuts (b) of the headless screws of the fuses so that you can slide out the
fuse blocks. Make note of the order of the washers on the screws.
128 Maintenance

5. Remove the screws, nuts and washers from the old fuses and attach them to the new
fuses. Make sure to keep the washers in the original order.
6. Insert the new fuses into their slots in the cubicle.Tighten the nuts to torque as follows:
• Bussmann fuses: 50 N·m (37 lbf·ft)
• Mersen (Ferraz Shawmut): 46 N·m (34 lbf·ft)
• Other: Refer to the fuse manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Reinstall the shrouding removed earlier and close the cubicle door.

 

D
 Maintenance 129

Fans
￭ Replacing the fan of the D7T supply module
The fan replacement procedure is the same for both the standard speed-controlled cooling
fan and direct-on-line fan (option +C188) of the D7T module.

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions given in ACS880 multidrive cabinets and
modules safety instructions (3AUA0000102301 [English]). If you ignore
the safety instructions, injury or death, or damage to the equipment can
occur.
If you are not a qualified electrical professional, do not do installation or
maintenance work.

WARNING!
Use the required personal protective equipment. Wear protective gloves and long
sleeves. Some parts have sharp edges.

1. Disconnect the drive from the AC power line and make sure it is safe to start the work.
See section Electrical safety precautions (page 98).
2. Open the cubicle door.
3. Remove the screws holding the front cover plate (a) and remove the cover.
4. Disconnect the fan wiring from the supply module (both the power supply plug and the
fiber optic control wiring).
5. Support the fan holder (b) from below and pull it to release it from the module.
6. Pull out the fan holder.
7. Transfer the fan control box (c) from the old fan holder to the new fan holder.
8. Install a new fan in reverse order.
130 Maintenance

b
a

c
 Maintenance 131

￭ Replacing the fan of the D8T supply module

The module is equipped with a fan unit that contains two cooling fans.

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions given in ACS880 multidrive cabinets and
modules safety instructions (3AUA0000102301 [English]). If you ignore
the safety instructions, injury or death, or damage to the equipment can
occur.
If you are not a qualified electrical professional, do not do installation or
maintenance work.

WARNING!
Use the required personal protective equipment. Wear protective gloves and long
sleeves. Some parts have sharp edges.

1. Stop the drive and do the steps in section Electrical safety precautions (page 98) before
you start the work.
2. Open the cubicle door.
3. Remove the shroud in front of the fan (if any).
4. Remove the screws holding the front cover plate. Lift the cover plate somewhat to
release it.
5. Disconnect the fan wiring.
6. Remove the unit below the fan.
7. Remove the screws of the fan unit.
8. Pull out the fan unit.
9. Install a new fan in reverse order.






132 Maintenance

￭ Replacing the direct-on-line fan (option +C188) of the D8T supply

module
WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions given in ACS880 multidrive cabinets and
modules safety instructions (3AUA0000102301 [English]). If you ignore
the safety instructions, injury or death, or damage to the equipment can
occur.
If you are not a qualified electrical professional, do not do installation or
maintenance work.

WARNING!
Use the required personal protective equipment. Wear protective gloves and long
sleeves. Some parts have sharp edges.

1. Stop the drive and do the steps in section Electrical safety precautions (page 98) before
you start the work.
2. Open the door.
3. Remove the shroud in front of the fan (if any).
4. Remove the screws holding the front cover plate. Lift the cover plate somewhat to
release it.
5. Remove the bracket.
6. Disconnect the wiring of the fan unit.
7. Remove the screws of the fan unit.
8. Pull out the fan unit.
9. Disconnect the fan wire from the fan unit.
10. Remove the screws of the fan.
11. Install a new fan in reverse order.
 Maintenance 133

10

10
6
134 Maintenance

￭ Replacing the circuit board compartment fan

Frame D8T supply modules are equipped with a fan blowing air through the circuit board
compartment.
The fan is accessible from the front of the module.

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions given in ACS880 multidrive cabinets and
modules safety instructions (3AUA0000102301 [English]). If you ignore
„ the safety instructions, injury or death, or damage to the equipment can
occur.
If you are not a qualified electrical professional, do not do installation or
maintenance work.

1. Stop the drive and do the steps in section Electrical safety precautions (page 98) before
you start the work.
2. Open the door of the module cubicle.
3. Remove the two M4×12 (T20) screws which lock the fan holder.
4. Pull the fan holder out of the module.
5. Disconnect the fan cable.

5
4

6. Remove the four M3 (5.5 mm) nuts which hold the fan.
 Maintenance 135

7. Remove the fan from the fan holder.

8. Put the fan onto the threaded studs on the fan holder with the airflow direction arrow
pointing towards the fan holder.
9. Install and tighten the four nuts removed earlier.

10. Connect the fan cable.

11. Align and push the fan holder into the module.
12. Install and tighten the two M4×12 (T20) screws.

10
11

12
136 Maintenance

￭ Replacing the cabinet cooling fans

Cabinets with ABB air outlet kits

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions given in ACS880 multidrive cabinets and
modules safety instructions (3AUA0000102301 [English]). If you ignore
the safety instructions, injury or death, or damage to the equipment can
occur.
If you are not a qualified electrical professional, do not do installation or
maintenance work.

1. Stop the drive and do the steps in section Electrical safety precautions (page 98) before
you start the work.
2. The instruction mentioned at each air outlet kit in chapter Ordering information contains
an exploded view of the outlet. Remove all gratings and filters, and finally remove the
plate on top of the outlet. Unscrew all necessary screws securing the fan and remove
it.
3. Install new fan in reverse order.

Cabinets with other fan types

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions given in ACS880 multidrive cabinets and
modules safety instructions (3AUA0000102301 [English]). If you ignore
the safety instructions, injury or death, or damage to the equipment can
occur.
If you are not a qualified electrical professional, do not do installation or
maintenance work.

1. Stop the drive and do the steps in section Electrical safety precautions (page 98) before
you start the work.
2. Follow the instructions of the manufacturer of the air outlet or enclosure system.
 Maintenance 137

Supply module
￭ Cleaning the heatsink
The drive module heatsink fins pick up dust from the cooling air. The drive runs into
overtemperature warnings and faults if the heatsink is not clean. When necessary, clean
the heatsink as follows.

WARNING!
Use the required personal protective equipment. Wear protective gloves and long
sleeves. Some parts have sharp edges.

WARNING!
Use a vacuum cleaner with antistatic hose and nozzle, and wear a grounding
wristband. Using a normal vacuum cleaner creates static discharges which can
damage circuit boards.

1. Stop the drive and do the steps in section Electrical safety precautions (page 98) before
you start the work.
2. Remove the module cooling fan(s). See the separate instructions.
3. Blow dry, clean and oil-free compressed air from bottom to top and simultaneously use
a vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust. If there is a risk of dust entering
adjoining equipment, do the cleaning in another room.
4. Reinstall the cooling fan.

￭ Replacing the D7T supply module

This section contains instructions on replacing the module from Rittal VX25 enclosure. The
instructions are valid for the example Rittal installations presented in this manual. Use the
lifting device 3AXD50000439997. For replacing the module from ABB drives ACx enclosure,
use lifting device 3AXD50000047447.
For the lifting devices ordering information, see section Lifting device for the D7T supply
module (page 221).

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions given in ACS880 multidrive cabinets and
modules safety instructions (3AUA0000102301 [English]). If you ignore
the safety instructions, injury or death, or damage to the equipment can
occur.
If you are not a qualified electrical professional, do not do installation or
maintenance work.
138 Maintenance

WARNING!
Use extreme caution when maneuvering the supply module. It is heavy and has
a high center of gravity. Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical
injury, or damage to the equipment.
• Use a lifting device:
• Attach the lifting device securely to the module lifting eyes before removing
the module fastening screws. For the location of the lifting eyes, see
Layout drawing of D7T supply module (page 29).
• Keep the lifting device attached to the module until you have lifted the
module onto a pallet (on a floor) and made sure that the module is
supported and cannot topple over.
• Lift a replacement module only with a lifting device. Keep the lifting device
attached to the module during the replacement work until you have
tightened the module fastening screws.
• When replacing a module, keep your fingers away from the edge of the module
front plate to avoid pinching them between the module and the cubicle.
• Wear protective gloves and long sleeves! Some parts have sharp edges.
• Do not tilt the module. Do not leave the module unattended on a floor.

1. Disconnect the drive from the AC power line and make sure it is safe to start the work.
See section Electrical safety precautions (page 98).
2. Open the cubicle door.
3. Remove the shrouds (if any).
4. Unplug the plug connector [X53] and fiber optic connectors in front of the module and
plug connector [X50] on top of the module. For the locations, see section Layout drawing
of D7T supply module (page 29).
5. Remove the module upper fastening screws and support bracket (a), and lower fastening
screws and support bracket (b). Remove the fastening bolts of the DC (c) and AC
busbars.
6. Install the module lifting device to the Rittal VX25 enclosure. For using the lifting device,
see Converter module lifting device for drive cabinets hardware manual
(3AXD50000210268).
7. Attach the lifting hooks to the lifting eyes of the module:
• Bend the DC busbars away from the module.
• Carefully pull the module out along the module guide plates until you can attach
the lifting hooks to the module. Tighten the chain.
8. Pull the module completely out of the cabinet along the module guide plates. Keep the
weight constantly on the lifting device.
9. Remove the upper module guide plate.
10. Lift the module somewhat to disconnect it from the lower guide plate and lift the module
down on a pallet.
11. Keep the lifting chain attached to the module and attach the module safely to the pallet
to prevent it from toppling over.
 Maintenance 139

12. Remove the lifting chain from the old module and move the module away.
13. Install the new module:
• Attach the lifting hook to the module, lift the module and place it on the lower module
guide plate. Keep the weight on the lifting device.
• Install the upper module guide plate.
• Push the module into cabinet along the guide plates and remove the lifting device.
• Fasten the support brackets and the module fastening screws.
• Tighten the fastening bolts of the DC and AC busbars to 70 N·m (51.6 lbf·ft).
• Plug the module plug connectors and fiber optic connectors.
• Fasten the shrouds.
• Close the cubicle door.

E
140 Maintenance

￭ Replacing the D8T supply module

This section contains instructions on replacing the module from Rittal VX25 enclosure. The
instructions are valid for the example Rittal installations presented in this manual. We assume
that you have the ABB module pull-out ramp in use (order code: 3AUA0000120467). If you
do not have the ramp, always use a lifting device when you remove the module.

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions given in ACS880 multidrive cabinets and
modules safety instructions (3AUA0000102301 [English]). If you ignore
the safety instructions, injury or death, or damage to the equipment can
occur.
If you are not a qualified electrical professional, do not do installation or
maintenance work.
 Maintenance 141

WARNING!
Be very careful when you move a module that runs on wheels. Ignoring the following
instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment.
• Do not move the module carelessly. It is heavy (approximately 175 kg) (386 lbs)
and has a high center of gravity. It topples over easily.
• When you remove the module, use the module pull-out ramp. Pull the module
carefully out of the cubicle along the ramp. While pulling on the handle, keep
a constant pressure with one foot on the base of the module to prevent the
module from falling on its back. We recommend that you attach a lifting device
to the module before you remove the module and keep it attached while
removing.
• When you install a module, use the module pull-out ramp. Keep your fingers
away from the edge of the module front plate to avoid pinching them between
the module and the cubicle. Also, keep a constant pressure with one foot on
the base of the module to prevent the module from falling on its back. We
recommend that you attach a lifting device to the module before you install
the module and keep it attached while installing.
• If you lift the module, use only the two lifting eyes on top of the module: one
in front and the other in back. Never lift the module from the hole inside the
module (visible from top). It cannot carry the weight of the whole module. For
the location of the lifting eyes, see section Layout drawing of D8T supply
module (page 31).
• Do not tilt the module. Do not leave the module unattended on a sloping floor.
• Wear protective gloves and long sleeves! Some parts have sharp edges.
• Do not use the module pull-out ramp with plinth heights over 100 mm (3.94 in).
The ramp is designed for a plinth height of 100 mm (the standard plinth height
of Rittal VX25 cabinets).

max.

Support the top and bottom of

Do not tilt! Do not leave the module unatten-
the module!
ded on a sloping floor!
max: 100 mm

NO LIFTING!

Do not use this hole for lifting! Mind your fingers! Support the top and bottom of
the module!
142 Maintenance

1. Disconnect the drive from the AC power line and make sure it is safe to start the work.
See section Electrical safety precautions (page 98).
2. Open the cubicle door.
3. Remove the shrouds (if any).
4. Disconnect the plug connector [X53] and fiber optic connectors in front of the module,
and plug connector [X50] on top of the module. For the locations, see section Layout
drawing of D8T supply module (page 31).
5. Install the module pull-out ramp: Push its hooks inside the cabinet and lock them tight
between the cabinet bottom plate and the cabinet frame.
6. Remove the module DC busbar bolts.
7. Remove the module fastening screws at the top of the module.
8. Remove the module fastening screws at the bottom of the module.
9. Pull the module carefully out of the cabinet along the ramp. While pulling on the handle,
keep a constant pressure with one foot on the base of the module to prevent the module
from falling on its back.
10. Install the new module into the cubicle:
• Push the module back in and attach. Be careful not to break the fastening screws:
tighten the fastening screws of the module to 22 N·m (16.2 lbf·ft). Tighten the
fastening bolts of the DC output busbars to 70 N·m (51.6 lbf·ft).
• Connect the module plug connectors and fiber optic connectors that you
disconnected earlier.
• Remove the module pull-out ramp, attach the shrouds (if any) and close the cabinet
doors.
 Maintenance 165
Maintenance 143

5
166 Maintenance
144 Maintenance

7 6 7

8
 Maintenance 145

Control panel
See ACx-AP-x assistant control panels user’s manual (3AUA0000085685 [English]).

Control unit
￭ BCU control unit types
There are three variants of the BCU control unit used in ACS880: BCU-02, BCU-12 and
BCU-22. These have a different number of converter module connections (2, 7 and 12
respectively) but are otherwise identical. The three BCU types are interchangeable as long
146 Maintenance

as the number of connections is sufficient. For example, the BCU-22 can be used as a direct
replacement for both BCU-02 and BCU-12.

￭ Replacing the memory unit

After replacing a control unit, you can keep the existing parameter settings by transferring
the memory unit from the defective control unit to the new control unit.

WARNING!
Do not remove or insert the memory unit when the control unit is powered.

1. Stop the drive and do the steps in section Electrical safety precautions (page 98) before
you start the work.
2. Make sure that the control unit is not powered.
3. Remove the fastening screw and pull the memory unit out.
4. Install a memory unit in reverse order.

￭ Replacing the BCU control unit battery

Replace the real-time clock battery if the BATT OK LED is not illuminated when the control
unit is powered.
1. Stop the drive and do the steps in section Electrical safety precautions (page 98) before
you start the work.
2. Undo the fastening screw and remove the battery.
3. Replace the battery with a new BR2032 battery.
 Maintenance 147

4. Dispose of the old battery according to local disposal rules or applicable laws.
5. Set the real-time clock.

LEDs and other status indicators

This section instructs how to interpret the status indications of the diode supply unit.
Information on warnings and faults reported by the control program and displayed on the
drive/converter/inverter control panel on the cabinet door are contained within the firmware
manual delivered with the drive.

￭ Control panel and panel platform/holder LEDs

The ACS-AP-… control panel has a status LED. The control panel mounting platform or
holder has two status LEDs. For their indications, see the following table.

Location LED Indication

Control panel Continuous green The unit is functioning normally.

Flickering green Data is transferred between the PC and the unit through the USB
connection of the control panel.

Blinking green There is an active warning in the unit.

Continuous red There is an active fault in the unit.

Blinking red There is a fault that requires the stopping and restarting of the
drive/converter/inverter.

Blinking blue (ACS- The Bluetooth interface is enabled, in discoverable mode, and
AP-W only) ready for pairing.

Flickering blue Data is being transferred through the Bluetooth interface of the
(ACS-AP-W only) control panel.

Control panel Red There is an active fault in the unit.

mounting platform or
holder (with the Green Power supply for the control unit is OK.
control panel
removed)
148 Maintenance

￭ Module LEDs
Frame D7T and D8T modules have three LEDs. For their indications, see the following
table.

LED Color Indication

FAULT Continuous red There is an active fault in the module.

ENABLE / STO Continuous green The module is ready for use.

ENABLE / STO Continuous yellow XSTO connectors are de-energized.

POWER OK Continuous green Supply voltage of the internal circuit boards is OK (> 21 V).

Reduced run
A “reduced run” function is available for supply/rectifier units consisting of parallel-connected
modules. The function makes it possible to continue operation with limited current even if
one (or more) module is out of service, for example, because of maintenance work.
In principle, reduced run is possible with only one module (or two modules in 12-pulse DSU),
but the physical requirements of operating the motor still apply; for example, the modules
remaining in use must be able to provide enough current.

￭ Starting reduced run operation

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions given in ACS880 multidrive cabinets and
modules safety instructions (3AUA0000102301 [English]). If you ignore
the safety instructions, injury or death, or damage to the equipment can
occur.
If you are not a qualified electrical professional, do not do installation or
maintenance work.

WARNING!
Use the required personal protective equipment. Wear protective gloves and long
sleeves. Some parts have sharp edges.

1. Stop the drive and do the steps in section Electrical safety precautions (page 98) before
you start the work.
2. If the control unit is powered from the faulty module, connect the control unit to another
24 V DC power supply. ABB strongly recommends using an external power supply with
supply/rectifier units consisting of parallel-connected modules.
3. Remove the module to be serviced from its bay. In 12-pulse DSU setups, the number
of modules in both windings must be equal, which means that at least two modules
have to be removed at once.
4. Install an air baffle (for example, plexiglass) to the top module guide to block the airflow
through the empty module bay.
5. Switch on the power to the supply/rectifier unit.
 Maintenance 149

6. Enter the number of supply/rectifier modules present into parameter 195.13 Reduced
run mode.
7. Reset all faults and start the supply/rectifier unit. The maximum current limit is now
automatically set according to the new configuration. A mismatch between the number
of detected modules (parameter 195.14) and the value set in 195.13 will generate a
fault.

￭ Resuming normal operation

WARNING!
Obey the safety instructions given in ACS880 multidrive cabinets and
modules safety instructions (3AUA0000102301 [English]). If you ignore
the safety instructions, injury or death, or damage to the equipment can
occur.
If you are not a qualified electrical professional, do not do installation or
maintenance work.

1. Stop the drive and do the steps in section Electrical safety precautions (page 98) before
you start the work.
2. Remove the air baffle from the module bay.
3. Reinstall the module into its bay.
4. Switch on the power to the supply/rectifier unit.
5. Enter "0" into parameter 195.13 Reduced run mode.
150
 Ordering information 151

9
Ordering information

Contents of this chapter

This chapter lists the types and ordering codes of the unit components.
You can find the kit-specific assembly drawings, step-by-step instructions and detailed kit
information on the Internet. Go to
https://sites-apps.abb.com/sites/lvacdrivesengineeringsupport/content. If necessary, contact
your local ABB representative.
Note:
• This chapter only lists the installation accessories available from ABB. All other parts
must be sourced from a third party (such as Rittal) by the system integrator. For a listing,
refer to the kit-specific installation instructions available at
https://sites-apps.abb.com/sites/lvacdrivesengineeringsupport/content. For access,
contact your local ABB representative.
• Parts that are labeled suitable for generic enclosures are not designed for any specific
enclosure system. These parts are intended as a basis for further engineering, and
may require additional parts to be fully usable.
Installation accessories designed for generic enclosures are in fact designed for an
inside width of 50 mm less than the nominal width of the enclosure. For example, a
mechanical kit intended for 800 mm wide generic enclosure is designed for an inside
width of 750 mm, and will not fit a 800 mm wide Rittal VX25 enclosure.

Kit code key

The kit codes shown in this chapter break down as follows.
The format of the kit code is x-w-s-yyy(-VX), for example, L-6-8-401 where:
• x = cooling method
152 Ordering information

• A = air-cooled (some of these kits are also used with liquid-cooled drives)
• L = liquid-cooled
• w = cabinet width
• 4 = 400 mm
• 6 = 600 mm
• 8 = 800 mm
• s = module frame size / sizes
• 1 = R1i
• 2 = R2i
• 3 = R3i
• 4 = R4i
• 5 = R5i
• 6 = R6i/D6D
• 7 = R7i/D7D/D7T
• 8 = R8i/D8D/D8T
• X = any, or not defined.
• yyy = consecutive numbering
• 001…099 = Kits related to cabinets, for example, adapter plates

001…019 Common AC- and DC-related kits

020…049 Cabinet mechanics kits
050…059 Swing frame kits

• 100…199 = Kits related to AC connection, for example, busbars

100…129 Kits with connection to AC

130…149 Kits with connection to module
150…199 Other kits related to AC connection

• 200…299 = Kits related to DC connection, for example, busbars

200…229 Kits with connection to common DC

230…249 Kits with connection to module
250…299 Other kits related to DC connection
 Ordering information 153

• 300…399 = Kits related to module installation, for example, mechanical supports

300…330 Module supporting kits, basic mechanical support

350…379 Shroud kits

• 400…499 = Other kits

400…419 Fan kits

420…439 Air guides
440…459 Cooling circuit kits

• VX = Kit specifically designed for the Rittal VX25 enclosure system. Many kits without
this designation are also used with the VX25 system.

Diode supply units – 2×D7T, 12-pulse

This section lists the component ordering codes for a diode supply unit which:
• consists of two D7T supply modules
• has a 12-pulse connection to AC power line
• is installed in the Rittal VX25 enclosure or in a generic cabinet.

￭ Diode supply modules – 2×D7T, 12-pulse

The type designation is the ordering code for the modules.

Diode supply module type Frame Contents

size
UN = 400 V
ACS880-304-0910A-3+A004+A018 2×D7T
UN = 500 V • Diode supply modules with half-controlled diode-
thyristor bridges and speed-controlled cooling fans
ACS880-304-0910A-5+A004+A018 2×D7T as standard
UN = 690 V
ACS880-304-0760A-7+A004+A018 2×D7T

Ordering code format Option codes

[Module type] + code [+code] … +C132: Marine type approval. For more information,
For example, ACS880-304-0910A-3+A004+A018 see ACS880 +C132 marine type-approved drive mod-
ules and module packages supplement
(3AXD50000037752 [English]).
+C188: Direct-on-line (DOL) cooling fan (230 V or
115 V)
+G304: 115 V auxiliary voltage supply
If you select both +C188 and +G304, 115 V DOL is
configured automatically.
154 Ordering information

Note: The following components are always required to construct a working unit out of the
modules and you must order them separately:
• BCU control unit kit. See section Control units – 12-pulse (page 187).
• A pair of fiber optic cables for the communication link between the control unit and each
module. See section Fiber optic cables for supply modules (page 187).
• Control circuit plug connectors for each supply module and the necessary cabling. See
section Control circuit plug connectors for supply modules (page 188).

￭ Mechanical installation accessories – 2×D7T, 12-pulse, Rittal VX25

Module installation parts
Module installation parts include, for example, top and bottom supports for the module.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

600 mm
2×D7T 1 A-6-7-320-VX 3AXD50000427932
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000426508

Shrouds
Shrouds are used for IP20 touch protection with the cabinet doors open.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

600 mm
2×D7T 1 A-6-8-360-VX 3AXD50000337378
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000335022

 Ordering information 155

AC busbar support
AC busbar support kit contains the busbar support and the screws and nuts for attaching
the support to the cabinet frame. the AC busbars between the common Flat-PLS busbars
of the cabinet and the module input terminals, or the related fixings are not included in the
kit.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

600 mm
2×D7T 1 A-6-7-150-VX 3AXD50000427956
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000431977

DC busbars

Module Enclosure width Qty Kit code Ordering code Instruction code
size
2×D7T 600 mm (23.62 in) 1 - - 3AXD50000432707

￭ Other components and tools – 2×D7T, 12-pulse

Component See section …

Main switch-disconnector Main switch-disconnectors (page 189)
AC fuses AC fuses (page 193)
Main contactor Main contactors (page 196)
Control panel and its door mounting Control panel (page 215)
Ventilation kits Ventilation kits (page 216)
Bracket for Flat-PLS busbar holder (Rittal VX25 ) Bracket for Rittal Flat-PLS busbar holder (common
AC) (page 222)
DC bus installation parts (for Rittal VX25 enclos-
ures) (page 223)
Lifting device Lifting device for the D7T supply module (page 221)
156 Ordering information

Diode supply units – 1×D8T, 6-pulse

This section lists the component ordering codes for a diode supply unit which:
• consists of one D8T supply module
• has a 6-pulse connection to AC power line
• is installed in the Rittal VX25 enclosure or in a generic cabinet.

￭ Diode supply modules – 1×D8T, 6-pulse

The type designations and power ratings for the modules are given in section
Ratings (page 225). The type designation is the ordering code for the modules.

Diode supply module type Frame Contents

size
UN = 400 V
ACS880-304-0650A-3+A018 D8T
ACS880-304-0980A-3+A018 D8T
UN = 500 V
• Diode supply module with half-controlled diode-
ACS880-304-0650A-5+A018 D8T thyristor bridges and speed-controlled cooling fans
ACS880-304-0980A-5+A018 D8T as standard

UN = 690 V
ACS880-304-0570A-7+A018 D8T
ACS880-304-0820A-7+A018 D8T

Ordering code format Option codes

[Module type] + code [+code] … +A004: 12-pulse option of half-controlled diode-thyristor
For example, ACS880-304-0650A-3 +A018 bridge
+C129: cULus listed
+C132: Marine type approval. For more information,
see ACS880 +C132 marine type-approved drive mod-
ules and module packages supplement
(3AXD50000037752 [English]).
+C134: CSA certified
+C183: Internal heating element in the module
+C188: Direct-on-line (DOL) cooling fan (400 V)
+G304: 115 V auxiliary voltage supply
Note: D8T DOL fan is always 400 V.

Note: The following components are always required to construct a working unit out of the
modules and you must order them separately:
• BCU control unit kits. See section Control units (page 186).
• A pair of fiber optic cables for the communication link between the control unit and each
module. See section Fiber optic cables for supply modules (page 187).
• Control circuit plug connectors for each supply module and the necessary cabling. See
section Control circuit plug connectors for supply modules (page 188).
• Quick connectors (3AUA0000119227) for each module. See section Quick connector
for D8T module (page 189).
 Ordering information 157

￭ Mechanical installation accessories – 1×D8T, 6-pulse, Rittal VX25

Module installation parts
Module installation parts include, for example, top and bottom supports for the module.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

400 mm
1×D8T 1 A-4-8-303-VX 3AXD50000371877
(15.75 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000372799

Shrouds
Shrouds are used for IP20 touch protection with the cabinet doors open.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

400 mm
1×D8T 1 A-4-8-359-VX 3AXD50000337484
(15.75 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000335169

158 Ordering information

AC busbars
The common AC Flat-PLS busbars of the cabinet connect to the supply module AC terminals
via the AC busbars, the AC busbars to quick connector and the AC quick connector.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

400 mm
1×D8T 1 A-4-8-102-VX 3AXD50000371853
(15.75 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000417247

AC busbars to quick connector

The common AC Flat-PLS busbars of the cabinet connect to the supply module AC terminals
via the AC busbars, the AC busbars to quick connector and the AC quick connector.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

400 mm
1×D8T 1 A-4-8-180-VX 3AXD50000371860
(15.75 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000379736

 Ordering information 159

DC busbars
The common DC Flat-PLS busbars of the cabinet connect to the supply module DC terminals
via the DC busbars and the DC connection flanges.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

400 mm
1×D8T 1 A-4-8-201-VX 3AXD50000371884
(15.75 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000373871

DC connection flanges
The common DC Flat-PLS busbars of the cabinet connect to the supply module DC terminals
via the DC busbars and the DC connection flanges.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

400 mm
1×D8T 1 A-468-8-230 3AXD50000002639
(15.75 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000002638

￭ Mechanical installation accessories – 1×D8T, 6-pulse, generic cabinet

Module installation „
parts
Module installation parts include, for example, top and bottom supports for the module.

Module Enclosure width Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size

1×D8T 400 mm (15.75 in) 1 A-4-8-307 3AXD50000002716

Instruction code: 3AXD50000002715

160 Ordering information

AC busbars to quick connector

The common AC busbars of the cabinet (user-defined) connect to the supply module AC
terminals via the AC busbars to quick connector and the AC quick connector.

Module Enclosure width Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size

1×D8T 400 mm (15.75 in) 1 A-4-8-183 3AXD50000004849

Instruction code: 3AXD50000006192

DC busbars
The common DC busbars of the cabinet (user-defined) connect to the supply module DC
terminals via the DC busbars and the DC connection flanges.

Module Enclosure width Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size

1×D8T 400 mm (15.75 in) 1 A-4-8-209 3AXD50000004850

Instruction code: 3AXD50000006191

DC connection flanges
The common DC busbars of the cabinet (user-defined) connect to the supply module DC
terminals via the DC busbars and the DC connection flanges.

Module Enclosure width Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size

1×D8T 400 mm (15.75 in) 1 A-468-8-230 3AXD50000002639

„ Instruction code: 3AXD50000002638

 Ordering information 161

￭ Other components and tools – 1×D8T, 6-pulse

Component See section …

Main switch-disconnector Main switch-disconnectors (page 189)
AC fuses AC fuses (page 193)
Main contactor Main contactors (page 196)
Control panel and its door mounting Control panel (page 215)
Ventilation kits Ventilation kits (page 216)
Bracket for Flat-PLS busbar holder (Rittal VX25) Bracket for Rittal Flat-PLS busbar holder (common
AC) (page 222)
DC bus installation parts (for Rittal VX25 enclos-
ures) (page 223)
Pull-out ramp Pull-out ramp for the D8T supply module (page 222)
162 Ordering information

Diode supply units – 2×D8T, 6-pulse

This section lists the component ordering codes for a diode supply unit which:
• consists of two D8T supply modules
• have a 6-pulse connection to AC power line
• is installed in the Rittal VX25 enclosure or in a generic cabinet.

￭ Diode supply modules – 2×D8T, 6-pulse

The type designations and power ratings for the modules are given in section
Ratings (page 225). The type designation is the ordering code for the modules.

Diode supply module type Frame Contents

size
UN = 400 V
ACS880-304-1210A-3+A018 2×D8T
ACS880-304-1820A-3+A018 2×D8T
UN = 500 V
• Diode supply modules with half-controlled diode-
ACS880-304-1210A-5+A018 2×D8T thyristor bridges and speed-controlled cooling fans
ACS880-304-1820A-5+A018 2×D8T as standard

UN = 690 V
ACS880-304-1060A-7+A018 2×D8T
ACS880-304-1520A-7+A018 2×D8T

Ordering code format Option codes

[Module type] + code [+code] … +A004: 12-pulse option of half-controlled diode-thyristor
For example, ACS880-304-1210A-3+A018 bridge
+C129: cULus listed
+C132: Marine type approval. For more information,
see ACS880 +C132 marine type-approved drive mod-
ules and module packages supplement
(3AXD50000037752 [English]).
+C134: CSA certified
+C183: Internal heating element in the module
+C188: Direct-on-line (DOL) cooling fan (400 V)
+G304: 115 V auxiliary voltage supply
Note: D8T DOL fan is always 400 V.

Note: The following components are always required to construct a working unit out of the
modules and you must order them separately:
• BCU control unit kits. See section Control units (page 186).
• A pair of fiber optic cables for the communication link between the control unit and each
module. See section Fiber optic cables for supply modules (page 187).
• Control circuit plug connectors for each supply module and the necessary cabling. See
section Control circuit plug connectors for supply modules (page 188).
• Quick connectors (3AUA0000119227) for each module. See section Quick connector
for D8T module (page 189).
 Ordering information 163

￭ Mechanical installation accessories – 2×D8T, 6-pulse, Rittal VX25

Module installation parts
Module installation parts include, for example, top and bottom supports for the module.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

600 mm
2×D8T 1 A-6-8-305-VX 3AXD50000422074
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000422401

Shrouds
Shrouds are used for IP20 touch protection with the cabinet doors open.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

600 mm
2×D8T 1 A-6-8-360-VX 3AXD50000337378
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000335022

164 Ordering information

AC busbars
The common AC Flat-PLS busbars of the cabinet connect to the supply module AC terminals
via the AC busbars, the AC busbars to quick connector and the AC quick connector.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

600 mm
2×D8T 1 A-6-8-103-VX 3AXD50000422081
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000431557

AC busbars to quick connector

The common AC Flat-PLS busbars of the cabinet connect to the supply module AC terminals
via the AC busbars, the AC busbars to quick connector and the AC quick connector.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

600 mm
2×D8T 1 A-6-8-182-VX 3AXD50000422098
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000430574

 Ordering information 165

DC busbars
The common DC Flat-PLS busbars of the cabinet connect to the supply module DC terminals
via the DC busbars and the DC connection flanges.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

600 mm
2×D8T 1 A-6-8-202-VX 3AXD50000422104
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000430550

DC connection flanges
The common DC Flat-PLS busbars of the cabinet connect to the supply module DC terminals
via the DC busbars and the DC connection flanges.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

A-468-8-230 (Rittal
600 mm
2×D8T 2 VX25 and generic 3AXD50000002639
(23.62 in)
enclosures)
Instruction code:
3AXD50000002638

￭ Mechanical installation accessories – 2×D8T, 6-pulse, generic cabinet

„
Module installation parts
Module installation parts include, for example, top and bottom supports for the module.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

600 mm
2×D8T 1 A-6-8-313 3AXD50000006135
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000006128

166 Ordering information

AC busbars to quick connector

The common AC busbars of the cabinet (user-defined) connect to the supply module AC
terminals via the AC busbars to quick connector and the AC quick connector.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

600 mm
2×D8T 1 A-6-8-184 3AXD50000006136
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000006270

DC busbars
The common DC busbars of the cabinet (user-defined) connect to the supply module DC
terminals via the DC busbars and the DC connection flanges.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

600 mm
2×D8T 1 A-6-8-210 3AXD50000006524
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000006281

DC connection flanges
The common DC busbars of the cabinet (user-defined) connect to the supply module DC
terminals via the DC busbars and the DC connection flanges.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

600 mm
2×D8T 2 A-468-8-230 3AXD50000002639
(23.62 in)
„
Instruction code: 3AXD50000002638
 Ordering information 167

￭ Other components and tools – 2×D8T, 6-pulse

Component See section …

Main switch-disconnector Main switch-disconnectors (page 189)
AC fuses AC fuses (page 193)
Main contactor Main contactors (page 196)
Main circuit breaker Main circuit breakers (page 198)
Control panel and its door mounting Control panel (page 215)
Ventilation kits Ventilation kits (page 216)
Bracket for Flat-PLS busbar holder (Rittal VX25) Bracket for Rittal Flat-PLS busbar holder (common
AC) (page 222)
DC bus installation parts (for Rittal VX25 enclos-
ures) (page 223)
Pull-out ramp Pull-out ramp for the D8T supply module (page 222)
168 Ordering information

Diode supply units – 2×D8T, 12-pulse

This section lists the component ordering codes for a diode supply unit which:
• consists of two D8T supply modules
• has a 12-pulse connection to AC power line
• is installed in the Rittal VX25 enclosure or in a generic cabinet.

￭ Diode supply modules – 2×D8T, 12-pulse

The type designations and power ratings for the modules are given in section
Ratings (page 225). The type designation is the ordering code for the modules.

Diode supply module type Frame Contents

size
UN = 400 V
ACS880-304-1210A-3+A004+A018 2×D8T
ACS880-304-1820A-3+A004+A018 2×D8T
UN = 500 V
• Diode supply modules with half-controlled di-
ACS880-304-1210A-5+A004+A018 2×D8T ode-thyristor bridges and speed-controlled
ACS880-304-1820A-5+A004+A018 2×D8T cooling fans as standard

UN = 690 V
ACS880-304-1060A-7+A004+A018 2×D8T
ACS880-304-1520A-7+A004+A018 2×D8T

Ordering code format Option codes

[Module type] + code [+code] … +C129: cULus listed
For example, ACS880-304-1210A-3 +A004+A018 +C132: Marine type approval. For more information,
see ACS880 +C132 marine type-approved drive mod-
ules and module packages supplement
(3AXD50000037752 [English]).
+C134: CSA certified
+C183: Internal heating element in the module
+C188: Direct-on-line (DOL) cooling fan (400 V)
+G304: 115 V auxiliary voltage supply
Note: D8T DOL fan is always 400 V.

Note: The following components are always required to construct a working unit out of the
modules and you must order them separately:
• BCU control unit kits. See section Control units (page 186).
• A pair of fiber optic cables for the communication link between the control unit and each
module. See section Fiber optic cables for supply modules (page 187).
• Control circuit plug connectors for each supply module and the necessary cabling. See
section Control circuit plug connectors for supply modules (page 188).
• Quick connectors (3AUA0000119227) for each module. See section Quick connector
for D8T module (page 189).
 Ordering information 169

￭ Mechanical installation accessories – 2×D8T, 12-pulse, Rittal VX25

Module installation parts
Module installation parts include, for example, top and bottom supports for the module.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

600 mm
2×D8T 1 A-6-8-305-VX 3AXD50000422074
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000422401

Shrouds
Shrouds are used for IP20 touch protection with the cabinet doors open.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

600 mm
2×D8T 1 A-6-8-360-VX 3AXD50000337378
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000335022

170 Ordering information

AC busbars
The common AC Flat-PLS busbars of the cabinet connect to the supply module AC terminals
via the AC busbars, the AC busbars to quick connector and the AC quick connector.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

600 mm
2×D8T 1 A-6-8-105-VX 3AXD50000427918
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000432417

AC busbars to quick connector

The common AC Flat-PLS busbars of the cabinet connect to the supply module AC terminals
via the AC busbars, the AC busbars to quick connector and the AC quick connector.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

600 mm
2×D8T 1 A-6-8-182-VX 3AXD50000422098
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000430574

 Ordering information 171

DC busbars
The common DC Flat-PLS busbars of the cabinet connect to the supply module DC terminals
via the DC busbars and the DC connection flanges.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

600 mm
2×D8T 1 A-6-8-202-VX 3AXD50000422104
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000430550

DC connection flanges
The common DC Flat-PLS busbars of the cabinet connect to the supply module DC terminals
via the DC busbars and the DC connection flanges.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

A-468-8-230 (Rittal
600 mm
2×D8T 2 VX25 and generic 3AXD50000002639
(23.62 in)
enclosures)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000002638

￭ Mechanical installation accessories and tool – 2×D8T, 12-pulse, generic

cabinet
„
Module installation parts
Module installation parts include, for example, top and bottom supports for the module.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

600 mm
2×D8T 1 A-6-8-313 3AXD50000006135
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000006128

172 Ordering information

AC busbars to quick connector

The common AC busbars of the cabinet (user-defined) connect to the supply module AC
terminals via the AC busbars to quick connector and the AC quick connector.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

600 mm
2×D8T 1 A-6-8-184 3AXD50000006136
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000006270

DC busbars
The common DC busbars of the cabinet (user-defined) connect to the supply module DC
terminals via the DC busbars and the DC connection flanges.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

600 mm
2×D8T 1 A-6-8-210 3AXD50000006524
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000006281

DC connection flanges
The common DC busbars of the cabinet (user-defined) connect to the supply module DC
terminals via the DC busbars and the DC connection flanges.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

600 mm
2×D8T 1 A-468-8-230 3AXD50000002639
(23.62 in)
„
Instruction code: 3AXD50000002638
 Ordering information 173

￭ Other components and tools – 2×D8T, 12-pulse

Component See section …

Main switch-disconnector Main switch-disconnectors (page 189)
AC fuses AC fuses (page 193)
Main contactor Main contactors (page 196)
Control panel and its door mounting Control panel (page 215)
Ventilation kits Ventilation kits (page 216)
Bracket for Flat-PLS busbar holder (Rittal VX25) Bracket for Rittal Flat-PLS busbar holder (common
AC) (page 222)
DC bus installation parts (for Rittal VX25 enclos-
ures) (page 223)
Pull-out ramp Pull-out ramp for the D8T supply module (page 222)
174 Ordering information

Diode supply units – 3×D8T, 6-pulse

This section lists the component ordering codes for a diode supply unit which:
• consists of three D8T supply modules
• has a 6-pulse connection to AC power line
• is installed in the Rittal VX25 enclosure or in a generic cabinet.
In the Rittal installations, the supply unit consist of one 1×D8T supply module cubicle and
one 2×D8T supply module cubicle. In the generic cabinet installations, the supply unit consist
of one 3×D8T supply module cubicle.

￭ Diode supply modules – 3×D8T, 6-pulse

The type designations and power ratings for the modules are given in section
Ratings (page 225). The type designation is the ordering code for the modules.

Diode supply module type Frame Contents

size
UN = 400 V
ACS880-304-2730A-3+A018 3×D8T
UN = 500 V • Diode supply modules with half-controlled diode-
thyristor bridges and speed-controlled cooling fans
ACS880-304-2730A-5+A018 3×D8T as standard
UN = 690 V
ACS880-304-2280A-7+A018 3×D8T

Ordering code format Option codes

[Module type] + code [+code] … +A004: 12-pulse option of half-controlled diode-thyristor
For example, ACS880-304-2730A-3 +A018 bridge
+C129: cULus listed
+C132: Marine type approval. For more information,
see ACS880 +C132 marine type-approved drive mod-
ules and module packages supplement
(3AXD50000037752 [English]).
+C134: CSA certified
+C183: Internal heating element in the module
+C188: Direct-on-line (DOL) cooling fan (400 V)
+G304: 115 V auxiliary voltage supply
Note: D8T DOL fan is always 400 V.

Note: The following components are always required to construct a working unit out of the
modules and you must order them separately:
• BCU control unit kits. See section Control units (page 186).
• A pair of fiber optic cables for the communication link between the control unit and each
module. See section Fiber optic cables for supply modules (page 187).
• Control circuit plug connectors for each supply module and the necessary cabling. See
section Control circuit plug connectors for supply modules (page 188).
• Quick connectors (3AUA0000119227) for each module. See section Quick connector
for D8T module (page 189).
 Ordering information 175

￭ Mechanical installation accessories – 3×D8T, 6-pulse, Rittal VX25

Module installation parts
Module installation parts include, for example, top and bottom supports for the module.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

400 mm
1×D8T 1 A-4-8-303-VX 3AXD50000371877
(15.75 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000372799

600 mm
2×D8T 1 A-6-8-305-VX 3AXD50000422074
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000422401

176 Ordering information

Shrouds
Shrouds are used for IP20 touch protection with the cabinet doors open.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

400 mm
1×D8T 1 A-4-8-359-VX 3AXD50000337484
(15.75 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000335169

600 mm
2×D8T 1 A-6-8-360-VX 3AXD50000337378
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000335022

 Ordering information 177

AC busbars
The common AC Flat-PLS busbars of the cabinet connect to the supply module AC terminals
via the AC busbars, the AC busbars to quick connector and the AC quick connector.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

400 mm
1×D8T 1 A-4-8-104-VX 3AXD50000371846
(15.75 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000384594

600 mm
2×D8T 1 A-6-8-103-VX 3AXD50000422081
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000431557

178 Ordering information

AC busbars to quick connector

The common AC Flat-PLS busbars of the cabinet connect to the supply module AC terminals
via the AC busbars, the AC busbars to quick connector and the AC quick connector.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

400 mm
1×D8T 1 A-4-8-180-VX 3AXD50000371860
(15.75 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000379736

600 mm
2×D8T 1 A-6-8-182-VX 3AXD50000422098
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000430574

 Ordering information 179

DC busbars
The common DC Flat-PLS busbars of the cabinet connect to the supply module DC terminals
via the DC busbars and the DC connection flanges.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

400 mm
1×D8T 1 A-4-8-201-VX 3AXD50000371884
(15.75 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000373871

600 mm
2×D8T 1 A-6-8-202-VX 3AXD50000422104
(23.62 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000430550

DC connection flanges
The common DC Flat-PLS busbars of the cabinet connect to the supply module DC terminals
via the DC busbars and the DC connection flanges.

Module Enclosure width Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size

400/600/800 mm
1×D8T 3 A-468-8-230 3AXD50000002639
(15.75/23.62/31.50 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000002638

180 Ordering information

￭ Mechanical installation accessories and tools – 3×D8T, 6-pulse, generic

cabinet
Module installation parts
Module installation parts include, for example, top and bottom supports for the module.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

800 mm
3×D8T 1 A-8-8-314 3AXD50000006117
(31.50 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000006142

AC busbars to quick connector

The common AC busbars of the cabinet (user-defined) connect to the supply module AC
terminals via the AC busbars to quick connector and the AC quick connector.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

800 mm
3×D8T 1 A-8-8-185 3AXD50000006514
(31.50 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000006272

 Ordering information 181

DC busbars
The common DC busbars of the cabinet (user-defined) connect to the supply module DC
terminals via the DC busbars and the DC connection flanges.

Module Enclosure Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size width

800 mm
3×D8T 1 A-8-8-211 3AXD50000006516
(31.50 in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000006284

DC connection flanges
The common DC busbars of the cabinet (user-defined) connect to the supply module DC
terminals via the DC busbars and the DC connection flanges.

Module Enclosure width Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size

400/600/800 mm
3×D8T 3 A-468-8-230 3AXD50000002639
(15.75/23.62/31.50in)

Instruction code: 3AXD50000002638

￭ Other components and tools – 3×D8T, 6-pulse

Component See section …

Main switch-disconnector Main switch-disconnectors (page 189)
AC fuses AC fuses (page 193)
Main circuit breaker Main circuit breakers (page 198)
Control panel and its door mounting Control panel (page 215)
Ventilation kits Ventilation kits (page 216)
Bracket for Flat-PLS busbar holder (Rittal VX25) Bracket for Rittal Flat-PLS busbar holder (common
AC) (page 222)
DC bus installation parts (for Rittal VX25 enclos-
ures) (page 223)
Pull-out ramp Pull-out ramp for the D8T supply module (page 222)
182 Ordering information

Diode supply units – 4×D8T, 5×D8T and 6×D8T 6-pulse

This section lists the component ordering codes for a diode supply unit which:
• consists of multiple D8T supply modules
• has a 6-pulse connection to AC power line
• is installed in the Rittal VX25 enclosure or in a generic cabinet.
For combining supply module cubicles into larger units, see Configuration overviews –
6-pulse (page 45).

￭ Diode supply modules – 4×D8T, 5×D8T and 6×D8T 6-pulse

The type designations and power ratings for the modules are given in section
Ratings (page 225). The type designation is the ordering code for the modules.

Diode supply module type Frame Contents

size
UN = 400 V
ACS880-304-3640A-3+A018 4×D8T
ACS880-304-4560A-3+A018 5×D8T
ACS880-304-5470A-3+A018 6×D8T
UN = 500 V
ACS880-304-3640A-5+A018 4×D8T • Diode supply modules with half-controlled diode-
thyristor bridges and speed-controlled cooling fans
ACS880-304-4560A-5+A018 5×D8T as standard
ACS880-304-5470A-5+A018 6×D8T
UN = 690 V
ACS880-304-3040A-7+A018 4×D8T
ACS880-304-3800A-7+A018 5×D8T
ACS880-304-4560A-7+A018 6×D8T

Ordering code format Option codes

[Module type] + code [+code] … +A004: 12-pulse option of half-controlled diode-thyristor
For example, ACS880-304-3640A-3 +A018 bridge
+C129: cULus listed
+C132: Marine type approval. For more information,
see ACS880 +C132 marine type-approved drive mod-
ules and module packages supplement
(3AXD50000037752 [English]).
+C134: CSA certified
+C183: Internal heating element in the module
+C188: Direct-on-line (DOL) cooling fan (400 V)
+G304: 115 V auxiliary voltage supply
Note: D8T DOL fan is always 400 V.
 Ordering information 183

Note: The following components are always required to construct a working unit out of the
modules and you must order them separately:
• BCU control unit kits. See section Control units (page 186).
• A pair of fiber optic cables for the communication link between the control unit and each
module. See section Fiber optic cables for supply modules (page 187).
• Control circuit plug connectors for each supply module and the necessary cabling. See
section Control circuit plug connectors for supply modules (page 188).
• Quick connectors (3AUA0000119227) for each module. See section Quick connector
for D8T module (page 189).

￭ Mechanical installation accessories – 4×D8T, 5×D8T and 6×D8T 6-pulse

For the mechanical installation accessories, see:
• Mechanical installation accessories – 1×D8T, 6-pulse, Rittal VX25 (page 157)
• Mechanical installation accessories – 2×D8T, 6-pulse, Rittal VX25 (page 163)
• Mechanical installation accessories – 2×D8T, 6-pulse, generic cabinet (page 165)
• Mechanical installation accessories and tools – 3×D8T, 6-pulse, generic
cabinet (page 180)

￭ Other components and tools – 4×D8T, 5×D8T and 6×D8T, 6-pulse

Component See section …

Main switch-disconnector Main switch-disconnectors (page 189)
AC fuses AC fuses (page 193)
Main circuit breaker Main circuit breakers (page 198)
Control panel and its door mounting Control panel (page 215)
Ventilation kits Ventilation kits (page 216)
Bracket for Flat-PLS busbar holder (Rittal VX25) Bracket for Rittal Flat-PLS busbar holder (common
AC) (page 222)
DC bus installation parts (for Rittal VX25 enclos-
ures) (page 223)
Pull-out ramp Pull-out ramp for the D8T supply module (page 222)
184 Ordering information

Diode supply units – 4×D8T and 6×D8T 12-pulse

This section lists the component ordering codes for a diode supply unit which:
• consists of multiple D8T supply modules
• have a 12-pulse connection to AC power line
• is installed in the Rittal VX25 enclosure or in a generic cabinet.
For combining supply module cubicles into larger units, see Configuration overviews –
12-pulse (page 47).

￭ Diode supply modules – 4×D8T and 6×D8T 12-pulse

The type designations and power ratings for the modules are given in section
Ratings (page 225). The type designation is the ordering code for the modules.

Diode supply module type Frame Contents

size
UN = 400 V
ACS880-304-2430A-3+A004+A018 4×D8T
ACS880-304-3640A-3+A004+A018 4×D8T
ACS880-304-5470A-3+A004+A018 6×D8T
UN = 500 V
ACS880-304-2430A-5+A004+A018 4×D8T • Diode supply modules with half-controlled diode-
thyristor bridges and speed-controlled cooling fans
ACS880-304-3640A-5+A004+A018 4×D8T as standard
ACS880-304-5470A-5+A004+A018 6×D8T
UN = 690 V
ACS880-304-2130A-7+A004+A018 4×D8T
ACS880-304-3040A-7+A004+A018 4×D8T
ACS880-304-4560A-7+A004+A018 6×D8T

Ordering code format Option codes

[Module type] + code [+code] … +C129: cULus listed
For example, ACS880-304-2430A-3 +A004+A018 +C132: Marine type approval. For more information,
see ACS880 +C132 marine type-approved drive mod-
ules and module packages supplement
(3AXD50000037752 [English]).
+C134: CSA certified
+C183: Internal heating element in the module
+C188: Direct-on-line (DOL) cooling fan (400 V)
+G304: 115 V auxiliary voltage supply
Note: D8T DOL fan is always 400 V.
 Ordering information 185

Note: The following components are always required to construct a working unit out of the
modules and you must order them separately:
• BCU control unit kits. See section Control units (page 186).
• A pair of fiber optic cables for the communication link between the control unit and each
module. See section Fiber optic cables for supply modules (page 187).
• Control circuit plug connectors for each supply module and the necessary cabling. See
section Control circuit plug connectors for supply modules (page 188).
• Quick connectors (3AUA0000119227) for each module. See section Quick connector
for D8T module (page 189).

￭ Mechanical installation accessories

Needed mechanical installation accessories depend on the width of the construction. For
the mechanical installation accessories, see:
• Mechanical installation accessories – 1×D8T, 6-pulse, Rittal VX25 (page 157)
• Mechanical installation accessories – 2×D8T, 12-pulse, Rittal VX25 (page 169)
• Mechanical installation accessories and tool – 2×D8T, 12-pulse, generic
cabinet (page 171)
• Mechanical installation accessories and tools – 3×D8T, 6-pulse, generic
cabinet (page 180)

￭ Other components and tools – 4×D8T and 6×D8T, 12-pulse

Component See section …

Main switch-disconnector Main switch-disconnectors (page 189)
AC fuses AC fuses (page 193)
Main circuit breaker Main circuit breakers (page 198)
Control panel and its door mounting Control panel (page 215)
Ventilation kits Ventilation kits (page 216)
Bracket for Flat-PLS busbar holder (Rittal VX25) Bracket for Rittal Flat-PLS busbar holder (common
AC) (page 222)
DC bus installation parts (for Rittal VX25 enclos-
ures) (page 223)
Pull-out ramp Pull-out ramp for the D8T supply module (page 222)
186 Ordering information

Control units
￭ Control units – 6-pulse

Supply module Size Control unit Qty Ordering code

UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
ACS880-304-0650A-3+A018
ACS880-304-0980A-3+A018
ACS880-304-0650A-5+A018
1xD8T
ACS880-304-0980A-5+A018
ACS880-304-0570A-7+A018
ACS880-304-0820A-7+A018
BCU-02 kit for DxT 1 3AXD50000006338
ACS880-304-1210A-3+A018
ACS880-304-1820A-3+A018
ACS880-304-1210A-5+A018
2xD8T
ACS880-304-1820A-5+A018
ACS880-304-1060A-7+A018
ACS880-304-1520A-7+A018
ACS880-304-2730A-3+A018
ACS880-304-2730A-5+A018 3xD8T
ACS880-304-2280A-7+A018
ACS880-304-3640A-3+A018
ACS880-304-3640A-5+A018 4xD8T
ACS880-304-3040A-7+A018
BCU-12 kit for DxT 1 3AXD50000006351
ACS880-304-4560A-3+A018
ACS880-304-4560A-5+A018 5xD8T
ACS880-304-3800A-7+A018
ACS880-304-5470A-3+A018
ACS880-304-5470A-5+A018 6xD8T
ACS880-304-4560A-7+A018
 Ordering information 187

￭ Control units – 12-pulse

The control unit kit contains: BCU control unit and memory unit with the control program.

Supply module Size Control unit Qty Ordering code

UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
ACS880-304-0910A-3+A004+A018
ACS880-304-0910A-5+A004+A018 2xD7T
ACS880-304-0760A-7+A004+A018
ACS880-304-1210A-3+A004+A018
ACS880-304-1820A-3+A004+A018 BCU-02 kit for DxT 1 3AXD50000006338
ACS880-304-1210A-5+A004+A018
2xD8T
ACS880-304-1820A-5+A004+A018
ACS880-304-1060A-7+A004+A018
ACS880-304-1520A-7+A004+A018
ACS880-304-2430A-3+A004+A018
ACS880-304-3640A-3+A004+A018
ACS880-304-2430A-5+A004+A018
4xD8T
ACS880-304-3640A-5+A004+A018
ACS880-304-2130A-7+A004+A018 BCU-12 kit for DxT 1 3AXD50000006351
ACS880-304-3040A-7+A004+A018
ACS880-304-5470A-3+A004+A018
ACS880-304-5470A-5+A004+A018 6xD8T
ACS880-304-4560A-7+A004+A018

Fiber optic cables for supply modules

The fiber optic cables are needed between the control unit and the supply module. The
cable kits are shown below. Select a kit with suitable length. You need one pair of cables
(kit) per each supply module.
The following kits, each consisting of a pair of plastic fiber optic cables, are available from
ABB:

Length Kit type designation Ordering code

2m NLWC-02 58988821
3m NLWC-03 58948233
5m NLWC-05 58948250
7m NLWC-07 58948268
10 m NLWC-10 58948276
188 Ordering information

Control circuit plug connectors for supply modules

The control circuit plug connectors are not included in the module kit but you must order
them separately:
• You need one plug connector X50 for the AC auxiliary power supply connection for
each diode supply module. See the table below.
• If you supply 24 V DC for the control unit from one diode supply module, you need one
plug connector X53.
Note: Plug connector for X53 is included in the module kit.
The user must acquire and install the cabling for the plug connectors. For more information
on the plug connectors, see section Connecting auxiliary power to the diode supply
module (page 106).

Connect- Data Qty Ordering code Illustration

or

STV S 9 SB 9-pole 6 KV/3

X50 (female) 4 mm2, 500 V, 1 per module 3AUA0000059813
32 A

MSTB 2.5/5-ST-5.08
X53 1 per module 3AXD50000012975
2.50 mm2, 320 V, 12 A
 Ordering information 189

Quick connector for D8T module

The module quick connector is not included in the diode supply module kit but you must
order it separately for each D8T supply module. The AC power input is connected to the
module through the quick connector. For the dimension drawing, see section Dimensions
of quick connector for D8T module (page 256).

Module Enclosure width Qty Kit code Ordering code Illustration

size

D8T 400 mm (15.75 in) 1 A-468-8-100 3AUA0000119227

Instruction code: 3AUA0000115013,

3AUA0000118667

Main switch-disconnectors
You must equip the electric supply of a machinery with a main disconnecting device
(IEC/EN60204-1). This section lists suitable main switch-disconnectors.
For the dimension drawings, see section Dimensions of main switch-disconnectors (page 260).
Note: For the high power units, you can use withdrawable main circuit breaker instead of
the main switch-disconnector. For some of the IEC lower power units, you can use either
the main switch-disconnector or the main circuit breaker. In the table, these lower power
units are marked with *. See section Main circuit breakers (page 198).

￭ IEC main switch-disconnector kits – 6-pulse

Supply module Size IEC switch-disconnectors Qty Ordering code

Type Data
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
ACS880-304-0650A-3+A018
ACS880-304-0980A-3+A018
ACS880-304-0650A-5+A018 1250 A,
1×D8T OT1250E12 1 3AXD50000006185
ACS880-304-0980A-5+A018 1000 V

ACS880-304-0570A-7+A018
ACS880-304-0820A-7+A018
ACS880-304-1210A-3+A018*
ACS880-304-1820A-3+A018* 2000 A,
OT2000E12 1 3AXD50000006186
ACS880-304-1210A-5+A018* 1000 V

ACS880-304-1820A-5+A018* 2×D8T
ACS880-304-1060A-7+A018 OT1250E12 1250 A, 1 3AXD50000006185
1000 V
ACS880-304-1520A-7+A018* OT2000E12 2000 A, 1 3AXD50000006186
1000 V
190 Ordering information

Kit contents:
• IEC main switch-disconnector
• Shaft (12 × 465 mm)
• OHB150J12P handle with on/off indication
• OA1G10 normally-open auxiliary contact block.

￭ UL main switch-disconnector kits – 6-pulse

Supply module Size UL switch-disconnectors Qty Ordering code

Type Data
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
ACS880-304-0650A-3+A018
ACS880-304-0980A-3+A018
ACS880-304-0650A-5+A018
1×D8T
ACS880-304-0980A-5+A018 OT1200U12 1200 A, 600 V 1 3AXD50000010814 *
ACS880-304-0570A-7+A018
ACS880-304-0820A-7+A018
ACS880-304-1060A-7+A018 2×D8T

Kit contents:
• UL main switch-disconnector
• Shaft (12 × 465 mm)
• OHB150J12P handle with on/off indication
• OA1G10 normally-open auxiliary contact block.
 Ordering information 191

￭ IEC main switch-disconnector kits – 12-pulse

Supply module Size IEC switch-disconnectors Qty Ordering code

Type Data
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
ACS880-304-0910A-3+A004+A018
ACS880-304-0910A-5+A004+A018 2×D7T
ACS880-304-0760A-7+A004+A018
ACS880-304-1210A-3+A004+A018
1250 A,
ACS880-304-1820A-3+A004+A018 OT1250E12DD 1 3AXD50000009845
1000 V
ACS880-304-1210A-5+A004+A018
2×D8T
ACS880-304-1820A-5+A004+A018
ACS880-304-1060A-7+A004+A018
ACS880-304-1520A-7+A004+A018
ACS880-304-2430A-3+A004+A018*
ACS880-304-3640A-3+A004+A018*
ACS880-304-2430A-5+A004+A018* 2000 A,
4×D8T OT2000E12 2 3AXD50000006186
ACS880-304-3640A-5+A004+A018* 1000 V

ACS880-304-2130A-7+A004+A018*
ACS880-304-3040A-7+A004+A018*

Kit contents (3AXD50000009845):

• IEC main switch-disconnector
• Shaft (12 × 395 mm)
• OHB200J12PTE08 handle
• OA1G10 normally-open auxiliary contact block (2 pcs).
Kit contents (3AXD50000006186):
• IEC main switch-disconnector
• Shaft (12 × 465 mm)
• OHB150J12P handle with on/off indication
• OA1G10 normally-open auxiliary contact block.
192 Ordering information

￭ UL main switch-disconnector kits – 12-pulse

Supply module Size UL switch-disconnectors Qty Ordering code

Type Data
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
ACS880-304-0910A-3+A004+A018
ACS880-304-0910A-5+A004+A018 2×D7T
ACS880-304-0760A-7+A004+A018
ACS880-304-1210A-3+A004+A018
1200 A,
ACS880-304-1820A-3+A004+A018 OT1200U12 2 3AXD50000010814 *
600 V
ACS880-304-1210A-5+A004+A018
2×D8T
ACS880-304-1820A-5+A004+A018
ACS880-304-1060A-7+A004+A018
ACS880-304-1520A-7+A004+A018

Kit contents:
• UL main switch-disconnector
• Shaft (12 × 465 mm)
• OHB150J12P handle with on/off indication
• OA1G10 normally-open auxiliary contact block.
 Ordering information 193

AC fuses
Always equip the supply unit either with the main AC fuses, module-specific AC fuses or
both:
• Equip the supply unit with main AC fuses to protect the supply modules against short
circuits.
Equip the supply unit with additional module-specific AC fuses, if
• the main AC fuses do not protect the supply modules
• the main contactor is installed
• there are parallel modules after the main AC fuses.
• Equip the supply unit only with module-specific AC fuses, if the main circuit breaker is
installed.
For the dimension drawings, see section Dimensions of AC fuses (page 265).

￭ IEC/UL main AC fuses – 6-pulse

Supply module Size AC fuses (IEC, UL) Qty Ordering code

Type Data
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
ACS880-304-0650A-3+A018 170M6415 1100 A, 690 V 3 68731658
ACS880-304-0980A-3+A018 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 3 68393108
ACS880-304-0650A-5+A018 170M6415 1100 A, 690 V 3 68731658
1×D8T
ACS880-304-0980A-5+A018 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 3 68393108
ACS880-304-0570A-7+A018 170M6414 1000 A, 690 V 3 68333296
ACS880-304-0820A-7+A018 170M6417 1400 A, 690 V 3 3AXD50000000150
ACS880-304-1210A-3+A018 170M7062 2000 A, 690 V 3 68689589
ACS880-304-1820A-3+A018 170M7064 3000 A, 690 V 3 3AXD50000001059
ACS880-304-1210A-5+A018 170M7062 2000 A, 690 V 3 68689589
2×D8T
ACS880-304-1820A-5+A018 170M7064 3000 A, 690 V 3 3AXD50000001059
ACS880-304-1060A-7+A018 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 3 68393108
ACS880-304-1520A-7+A018 170M7063 2500 A, 690 V 3 68752591
194 Ordering information

￭ IEC/UL module-specific AC fuses – 6-pulse

Supply module Size AC fuses (IEC, UL) Qty Ordering code

Type Data
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
ACS880-304-1210A-3+A018 170M6415 1100 A, 690 V 6 68731658
ACS880-304-1820A-3+A018 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 6 68393108
ACS880-304-1210A-5+A018 170M6415 1100 A, 690 V 6 68731658
2×D8T
ACS880-304-1820A-5+A018 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 6 68393108
ACS880-304-1060A-7+A018 170M6414 1000 A, 690 V 6 68333296
ACS880-304-1520A-7+A018 170M6417 1400 A, 690 V 6 3AXD50000000150
ACS880-304-2730A-3+A018 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 9 68393108
ACS880-304-2730A-5+A018 3×D8T 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 9 68393108
ACS880-304-2280A-7+A018 170M6417 1400 A, 690 V 9 3AXD50000000150
ACS880-304-3640A-3+A018 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 12 68393108
ACS880-304-3640A-5+A018 4×D8T 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 12 68393108
ACS880-304-3040A-7+A018 170M6417 1400 A, 690 V 12 3AXD50000000150
ACS880-304-4560A-3+A018 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 15 68393108
ACS880-304-4560A-5+A018 5×D8T 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 15 68393108
ACS880-304-3800A-7+A018 170M6417 1400 A, 690 V 15 3AXD50000000150
ACS880-304-5470A-3+A018 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 18 68393108
ACS880-304-5470A-5+A018 6×D8T 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 18 68393108
ACS880-304-4560A-7+A018 170M6417 1400 A, 690 V 18 3AXD50000000150

￭ IEC main AC fuses – 12-pulse

Supply module Size AC fuses (IEC) Qty Ordering code

Type Data
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
ACS880-304-0910A-3+A004+A018 170M6412 800 A, 690 V 6 68731640
ACS880-304-0910A-5+A004+A018 2×D7T 170M6412 800 A, 690 V 6 68731640
ACS880-304-0760A-7+A004+A018 170M6411 700 A, 690 V 6 3AXD50000000175
ACS880-304-1210A-3+A004+A018 170M6415 1100 A, 690 V 6 68731658
ACS880-304-1820A-3+A004+A018 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 6 68393108
ACS880-304-1210A-5+A004+A018 170M6415 1100 A, 690 V 6 68731658
2×D8T
ACS880-304-1820A-5+A004+A018 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 6 68393108
ACS880-304-1060A-7+A004+A018 170M6414 1000 A, 690 V 6 68333296
ACS880-304-1520A-7+A004+A018 170M6417 1400 A, 690 V 6 3AXD50000000150
ACS880-304-2430A-3+A004+A018 170M7062 2000 A, 690 V 6 68689589
ACS880-304-3640A-3+A004+A018 170M7064 3000 A, 690 V 6 3AXD50000001059
ACS880-304-2430A-5+A004+A018 170M7062 2000 A, 690 V 6 68689589
4×D8T
ACS880-304-3640A-5+A004+A018 170M7064 3000 A, 690 V 6 3AXD50000001059
ACS880-304-2130A-7+A004+A018 170M7062 2000 A, 690 V 6 68689589
ACS880-304-3040A-7+A004+A018 170M7063 2500 A, 690 V 6 68752591
 Ordering information 195

￭ UL main AC fuses – 12-pulse

Supply module Size AC fuses (UL) Qty Ordering code

Type Data
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
ACS880-304-0910A-3+A004+A018 170M6412 800 A, 690 V 6 68731640
ACS880-304-0910A-5+A004+A018 2×D7T 170M6412 800 A, 690 V 6 68731640
ACS880-304-0760A-7+A004+A018 170M6411 700 A, 690 V 6 3AXD50000000175
ACS880-304-1210A-3+A004+A018 170M6415 1100 A, 690 V 6 68731658
ACS880-304-1820A-3+A004+A018 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 6 68393108
ACS880-304-1210A-5+A004+A018 170M6415 1100 A, 690 V 6 68731658
2×D8T
ACS880-304-1820A-5+A004+A018 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 6 68393108
ACS880-304-1060A-7+A004+A018 170M6414 1000 A, 690 V 6 68333296
ACS880-304-1520A-7+A004+A018 170M6417 1400 A, 690 V 6 3AXD50000000150

￭ IEC module-specific AC fuses – 12-pulse

Supply module Size AC fuses (IEC) Qty Ordering code

Type Data
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
ACS880-304-5470A-3+A004+A018 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 18 68393108
ACS880-304-5470A-5+A004+A018 6×D8T 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 18 68393108
ACS880-304-4560A-7+A004+A018 170M6417 1400 A, 690 V 18 3AXD50000000150

￭ UL module-specific AC fuses – 12-pulse

Supply module Size AC fuses (UL) Qty Ordering code

Type Data
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
ACS880-304-2430A-3+A004+A018 170M6415 1100 A, 690 V 12 68731658
ACS880-304-3640A-3+A004+A018 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 12 68393108
ACS880-304-2430A-5+A004+A018 170M6415 1100 A, 690 V 12 68731658
4×D8T
ACS880-304-3640A-5+A004+A018 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 12 68393108
ACS880-304-2130A-7+A004+A018 170M6414 1000 A, 690 V 12 68333296
ACS880-304-3040A-7+A004+A018 170M6417 1400 A, 690 V 12 3AXD50000000150
ACS880-304-5470A-3+A004+A018 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 18 68393108
ACS880-304-5470A-5+A004+A018 6×D8T 170M6419 1600 A, 690 V 18 68393108
ACS880-304-4560A-7+A004+A018 170M6417 1400 A, 690 V 18 3AXD50000000150
196 Ordering information

Main contactors
You can use the main contactors for the on-off control of the AC input power. The contactors
can make and break the full load current.
The contactor package includes:
• contactor unit
• 2 × normally-open OA1G10 + 2 × normally-closed auxiliary contacts OA1G01.
For the dimension drawings, see section Dimensions of main contactors (page 267).

￭ IEC/UL main contactors – 6-pulse

Supply module type Size Main contactor (IEC, UL) Qty Ordering code
Type Data
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
ACS880-304-0650A-3+A018
ACS880-304-0980A-3+A018
ACS880-304-0650A-5+A018 1260 A (ITh),
1×D8T AF1250-30-22-70 1 68687284
ACS880-304-0980A-5+A018 1000 V (UE)

ACS880-304-0570A-7+A018
ACS880-304-0820A-7+A018
1650 A (ITh),
ACS880-304-1210A-3+A018 AF1650-30-22-70 1 64731378
1000 V (UE)
2050 A (ITh),
ACS880-304-1820A-3+A018 AF2050-30-22-70 1 3AUA0000051805
1000 V (UE)
1650 A (ITh),
ACS880-304-1210A-5+A018 AF1650-30-22-70 1 64731378
1000 V (UE)
2×D8T
2050 A (ITh),
ACS880-304-1820A-5+A018 AF2050-30-22-70 1 3AUA0000051805
1000 V (UE)
1250 A (ITh),
ACS880-304-1060A-7+A018 AF1250-30-22-70 1 68687284
1000 V (UE)
1650 A (ITh),
ACS880-304-1520A-7+A018 AF1650-30-22-70 1 64731378
1000 V (UE)
 Ordering information 197

￭ IEC main contactors – 12-pulse

Supply module type Size Main contactor (IEC) Qty Ordering code
Type Data
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
ACS880-304-0910A-3+A004+A018
1260 A (ITh),
ACS880-304-0910A-5+A004+A018 2×D7T AF1250-30-22-70 2 68687284
1000 V (UE)
ACS880-304-0760A-7+A004+A018
ACS880-304-1210A-3+A004+A018
ACS880-304-1820A-3+A004+A018
ACS880-304-1210A-5+A004+A018 1260 A (ITh),
2×D8T AF1250-30-22-70 2 68687284
ACS880-304-1820A-5+A004+A018 1000 V (UE)

ACS880-304-1060A-7+A004+A018
ACS880-304-1520A-7+A004+A018
1650 A (ITh),
ACS880-304-2430A-3+A004+A018 AF1650-30-22-70 2 64731378
1000 V (UE)
2050 A (ITh),
ACS880-304-3640A-3+A004+A018 AF2050-30-22-70 2 3AUA0000051805
1000 V (UE)
1650 A (ITh),
ACS880-304-2430A-5+A004+A018 AF1650-30-22-70 2 64731378
1000 V (UE)
4×D8T
2050 A (ITh),
ACS880-304-3640A-5+A004+A018 AF2050-30-22-70 2 3AUA0000051805
1000 V (UE)
1650 A (ITh),
ACS880-304-2130A-7+A004+A018 AF1650-30-22-70 2 64731378
1000 V (UE)
2050 A (ITh),
ACS880-304-3040A-7+A004+A018 AF2050-30-22-70 2 3AUA0000051805
1000 V (UE)

￭ UL main contactors – 12-pulse

Supply module type Size Main contactor (UL) Qty Ordering code
Type Data
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
ACS880-304-0910A-3+A004+A018
1260 A (ITh),
ACS880-304-0910A-5+A004+A018 2×D7T AF1250-30-22-70 2 68687284
1000 V (UE)
ACS880-304-0760A-7+A004+A018
ACS880-304-1210A-3+A004+A018
ACS880-304-1820A-3+A004+A018
ACS880-304-1210A-5+A004+A018 1260 A (ITh),
2×D8T AF1250-30-22-70 2 68687284
ACS880-304-1820A-5+A004+A018 1000 V (UE)

ACS880-304-1060A-7+A004+A018
ACS880-304-1520A-7+A004+A018
198 Ordering information

Main circuit breakers

You can use the main circuit breakers below for the on-off control of the AC input power.
The breakers can make and break the full load current and also break a fault current. When
installed in a wagon, the breakers are withdrawable and operate as main disconnecting
device for the supply units. (You must equip the electric supply of a machinery with a main
disconnecting device (IEC/EN60204-1).)
Note: For some of the IEC lower power units, you can use either the main
switch-disconnector or the main circuit breaker. In the table, these lower power units are
marked with *.
Note: UL main circuit breakers have IEC certification according to IEC 60947. See ABB
SACE catalogs for further details.
For illustrations and dimensions, see manufactures data sheet in the Internet.

￭ IEC main circuit breakers – 6-pulse 230 V

Main circuit breaker (IEC)

Supply module Size Type Data Qty Ordering code
ACS880-304-…
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
1210A-3+A018* 2×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 1600 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048327
1820A-3+A018* 2×D8T E2.2S-A 2000 2000 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048330
1210A-5+A018* 2×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 1600 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048327
1820A-5+A018* 2×D8T E2.2S-A 2000 2000 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048330
1520A-7+A018* 2×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 1600 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048327
2730A-3+A018 3×D8T E4.2S 3200 3200 A, 690 V, 3P, 66 kA, IEC 1 3AXD50000048346
2730A-5+A018 3×D8T E4.2S 3200 3200 A, 690 V, 3P, 66 kA, IEC 1 3AXD50000048346
2280A-7+A018 3×D8T E4.2S-A 2500 2500 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048343
3640A-3+A018 4×D8T E6.2V-A 4000 4000 A, 690 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048348
3640A-5+A018 4×D8T E6.2V-A 4000 4000 A, 690 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048348
3040A-7+A018 4×D8T E4.2S 3200 3200 A, 690 V, 3P, 66 kA, IEC 1 3AXD50000048346
4560A-3+A018 5×D8T E6.2V-A 5000 5000 A, 690 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048352
4560A-5+A018 5×D8T E6.2V-A 5000 5000 A, 690 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048352
3800A-7+A018 5×D8T E6.2V-A 4000 4000 A, 690 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048348
5470A-3+A018 6×D8T E6.2V 6300 6300 A, 690 V, 3P, 100 kA, IEC 1 3AXD50000048350
5470A-5+A018 6×D8T E6.2V 6300 6300 A, 690 V, 3P, 100 kA, IEC 1 3AXD50000048350
4560A-7+A018 6×D8T E6.2V-A 5000 5000 A, 690 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048352

Content of the 6-pulse 230 V main circuit breakers

Ekip Dip LI 3p WMP 1SDA077658R1 (E2.2S-A 1600)
1SDA077668R1 (E2.2S-A 2000)
1SDA072501R1 (E4.2S 3200)
1SDA078458R1 (E4.2S-A 2500)
1SDA079128R1 (E6.2V-A 4000)
1SDA079138R1 (E6.2V-A 5000)
1SDA072651R1 (E6.2V 6300)
YO E1.2...E6.2 220-240 Vac/dc 1SDA073674R1
 Ordering information 199

Content of the 6-pulse 230 V main circuit breakers

YC E1.2...E6.2 220-240 Vac/dc 1SDA073687R1
YU E1.2...E6.2 220-240 Vac/dc 1SDA073700R1
M E2.2...E6.2 220-250 Vac/dc 1SDA073725R1
MOC E2.2...E6.2 1SDA073781R1
AUX 6Q 400V E2.2...E6.2 1SDA073756R1
KLC-S Key lock open N.20005 E2.2...E6.2 1SDA073792R1
KLP-S Key lock racked in/out N.20005 E2.2...E6.2 1st 1SDA073807R1
key

TRIPLE CERTIFIC: UL/IEC/CCC 1) 1SDA083022R1 (E2.2S)

1SDA083025RI (E4.2S)
1SDA083028RI (E6.2V)

1) Certificate not included in E4.2S 3200 and E6.2V 6300.

For adapting E2.2S-A, E4.2S-A and E6.2V-A air circuit breakers to IEC bus bars, use a bus
bar shim kit. See section IEC bus bar shim kit (page 214).

Wagon (IEC)
Supply module Type Data Qty Ordering code
ACS880-304-…
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
1210A-3+A018*
1820A-3+A018*
1210A-5+A018* E2.2-A_W_FP_2000HR-HR_UL 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 1 3AXD50000048354
1820A-5+A018*
1520A-7+A018*
2730A-3+A018
E4.2_W_FP_3200_HR-HR_IEC 3-pole rear HR-HR term., IEC 1 3AXD50000048356
2730A-5+A018
2280A-7+A018 E4.2-A_W_FP_2500HR-HR_UL 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 1 3AXD50000039281
3640A-3+A018
E6.2-A_W_FP_5000HR-HR_UL 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 1 3AXD50000048402
3640A-5+A018
3040A-7+A018 E4.2_W_FP_3200_HR-HR_IEC 3-pole rear HR-HR term., IEC 1 3AXD50000048356
4560A-3+A018
4560A-5+A018 E6.2-A_W_FP_5000HR-HR_UL 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 1 3AXD50000048402
3800A-7+A018
5470A-3+A018
E6.2X_W_FP_6300_HR 3-pole rear HR-HR term., IEC 1 3AXD50000048353
5470A-5+A018
4560A-7+A018 E6.2-A_W_FP_5000HR-HR_UL 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 1 3AXD50000048402

Content of the 6-pulse 230 V wagons

W FP lu=2000 3p HR HR UL / 1SDA079698R1 (E2.2-A_W_FP_2000)
W FP lu=2500 3p HR HR UL / 1SDA079700R1 (E4.2-A_W_FP_2500)
WAGON W FP lu=5000 HR HR UL 1SDA079706R1 (E6.2-A_W_FP_5000)
AUP 5 contacts 400V E2.2...E6.2 - left set 1SDA080373R1
IEC-wagons E4.2_W_FP_3200 and E6.2X_W_FP_6300
200 Ordering information

Content of the 6-pulse 230 V wagons

W FP lu=3200 HR HR, IEC 1SDA073913R1 (E4.2_W_FP_3200)
W FP lu=6300 or X version 3p HR HR 1SDA073920R1 (E6.2X_W_FP_6300)
AUP 5 contacts 400V E2.2...E6.2, IEC 1SDA073764R1

For adapting E2.2S-A, E4.2S-A and E6.2V-A air circuit breakers to IEC bus bars, use a bus
bar shim kit. See section IEC bus bar shim kit (page 214).

￭ UL main circuit breakers – 6-pulse 230 V

Main circuit breaker (UL)

Supply module Size Type Data Qty Ordering code
ACS880-304-…
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
1210A-3+A018 2×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 1600 A, 600 V, 3P, 65 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048327
1820A-3+A018 2×D8T E2.2S-A 2000 2000 A, 600 V, 3P, 65 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048330
1210A-5+A018 2×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 1600 A, 600 V, 3P, 65 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048327
1820A-5+A018 2×D8T E2.2S-A 2000 2000 A, 600 V, 3P, 65 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048330
1520A-7+A018 2×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 1600 A, 600 V, 3P, 65 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048327
2730A-3+A018 3×D8T E6.2V-A 4000 3200 A, 600 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048348
2730A-5+A018 3×D8T E6.2V-A 4000 3200 A, 600 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048348
2280A-7+A018 3×D8T E4.2S-A 2500 2500 A, 600 V, 3P, 65 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048343
3640A-3+A018 4×D8T E6.2V-A 4000 4000 A, 600 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048348
3640A-5+A018 4×D8T E6.2V-A 4000 4000 A, 600 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048348
3040A-7+A018 4×D8T E6.2V-A 4000 3200 A, 600 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048348
4560A-3+A018 5×D8T E6.2V-A 5000 5000 A, 600 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048352
4560A-5+A018 5×D8T E6.2V-A 5000 5000 A, 600 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048352
3800A-7+A018 5×D8T E6.2V-A 4000 4000 A, 600 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048348
5470A-3+A018 6×D8T
Not available from ABB
5470A-5+A018 6×D8T
4560A-7+A018 6×D8T E6.2V-A 5000 5000 A, 600 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048352

Content of the 6-pulse 230 V main circuit breakers

Ekip Dip LI 3p WMP 1SDA077658R1 (E2.2S-A 1600)
1SDA077668R1 (E2.2S-A 2000)
1SDA079128R1 (E6.2V-A 4000)
1SDA078458R1 (E4.2S-A 2500)
1SDA079138R1 (E6.2V-A 5000)
YO E1.2...E6.2 220-240 Vac/dc 1SDA073674R1
YC E1.2...E6.2 220-240 Vac/dc 1SDA073687R1
YU E1.2...E6.2 220-240 Vac/dc 1SDA073700R1
M E2.2...E6.2 220-250 Vac/dc 1SDA073725R1
MOC E2.2...E6.2 1SDA073781R1
AUX 6Q 400V E2.2...E6.2 1SDA073756R1
KLC-S Key lock open N.20005 E2.2...E6.2 1SDA073792R1
 Ordering information 201

Content of the 6-pulse 230 V main circuit breakers

KLP-S Key lock racked in/out N.20005 E2.2...E6.2 1st 1SDA073807R1
key
TRIPLE CERTIFIC: UL/IEC/CCC 1SDA083022R1 (E2.2S)
1SDA083025RI (E4.2S)
1SDA083028RI (E6.2V)

Wagon (UL)
Supply module
Type Data Qty Ordering code
ACS880-304-…
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
1210A-3+A018
1820A-3+A018
1210A-5+A018 E2.2-A_W_FP_2000HR-HR_UL 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 1 3AXD50000048354
1820A-5+A018
1520A-7+A018
2730A-3+A018
E6.2-A_W_FP_5000HR-HR_UL 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 1 3AXD50000048402
2730A-5+A018
2280A-7+A018 E4.2-A_W_FP_2500HR-HR_UL 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 1 3AXD50000039281
3640A-3+A018
3640A-5+A018
3040A-7+A018
E6.2-A_W_FP_5000HR-HR_UL 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 1 3AXD50000048402
4560A-3+A018
4560A-5+A018
3800A-7+A018
5470A-3+A018
Not available from ABB
5470A-5+A018
4560A-7+A018 E6.2-A_W_FP_5000HR-HR_UL 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 1 3AXD50000048402

Content of the 6-pulse 230 V wagons

W FP lu=2000 3p HR HR UL / 1SDA079698R1 (E2.2-A_W_FP_2000)
W FP lu=2500 3p HR HR UL / 1SDA079700R1 (E4.2-A_W_FP_2500)
WAGON W FP lu=5000 HR HR UL 1SDA079706R1 (E6.2-A_W_FP_5000)
AUP 5 contacts 400V E2.2...E6.2 - left set 1SDA080373R1
202 Ordering information

￭ IEC main circuit breakers – 12-pulse 230 V

Main circuit breaker (IEC)

Supply module ACS880- Size Type Data Qty Ordering code
304-…
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
2430A-3+A004+A018* 4×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 1600 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, 2 3AXD50000048327
UL
3640A-3+A004+A018* 4×D8T E2.2S-A 2000 2000 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, 2 3AXD50000048330
UL
2430A-5+A004+A018* 4×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 1600 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, 2 3AXD50000048327
UL
3640A-5+A004+A018* 4×D8T E2.2S-A 2000 2000 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, 2 3AXD50000048330
UL
2130A-7+A004+A018* 4×D8T E2.2S-A 1200 1250 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, 2 3AXD50000048328
UL
3040A-7+A004+A018* 4×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 1600 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, 2 3AXD50000048327
UL
5470A-3+A004+A018 6×D8T E4.2S 3200 3200 A, 690 V, 3P, 66 kA, 2 3AXD50000048346
IEC
5470A-5+A004+A018 6×D8T E4.2S 3200 3200 A, 690 V, 3P, 66 kA, 2 3AXD50000048346
IEC
4560A-7+A004+A018 6×D8T E4.2S-A 2500 2500 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, 2 3AXD50000048343
UL

Content of the 12-pulse 230 V main circuit breakers

Ekip Dip LI 3p WMP 1SDA077658R1 (E2.2S-A 1600)
1SDA077668R1 (E2.2S-A 2000)
1SDA072501R1 (E4.2S 3200)
1SDA078458R1 (E4.2S-A 2500)
YO E1.2...E6.2 220-240 Vac/dc 1SDA073674R1
YC E1.2...E6.2 220-240 Vac/dc 1SDA073687R1
YU E1.2...E6.2 220-240 Vac/dc 1SDA073700R1
M E2.2...E6.2 220-250 Vac/dc 1SDA073725R1
MOC E2.2...E6.2 1SDA073781R1
AUX 6Q 400V E2.2...E6.2 1SDA073756R1
KLC-S Key lock open N.20005 E2.2...E6.2 1SDA073792R1
KLP-S Key lock racked in/out N.20005 E2.2...E6.2 1st 1SDA073807R1
key

TRIPLE CERTIFIC: UL/IEC/CCC 1) 1SDA083022R1 (E2.2S)

1SDA083025RI (E4.2S)

1) Certificate not included in E4.2S 3200

 Ordering information 203

Wagon (IEC)
Supply module
Type Data Qty Ordering code
ACS880-304-…
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
2430A-
3+A004+A018*
3640A-
3+A004+A018*
2430A-
5+A004+A018* E2.2-A_W_FP_2000HR-
3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 2 3AXD50000048354
3640A- HR_UL
5+A004+A018*
2130A-
7+A004+A018*
3040A-
7+A004+A018*
5470A-
3+A004+A018 E4.2_W_FP_3200_HR-
3-pole rear HR-HR term., IEC 2 3AXD50000048356
5470A- HR_IEC
5+A004+A018
4560A- E4.2-A_W_FP_2500HR-
3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 2 3AXD50000039281
7+A004+A018 HR_UL

Content of the 12-pulse 230 V wagons

W FP lu=2000 3p HR HR UL / 1SDA079698R1 (E2.2-A_W_FP_2000)
W FP lu=2500 3p HR HR UL 1SDA079700R1 (E4.2-A_W_FP_2500)
AUP 5 contacts 400V E2.2...E6.2 - left set 1SDA080373R1
IEC-wagon E4.2_W_FP_3200
W FP lu=3200 HR HR, IEC 1SDA073913R1 (E4.2_W_FP_3200)
AUP 5 contacts 400V E2.2...E6.2, IEC 1SDA073764R1
204 Ordering information

￭ UL main circuit breakers – 12-pulse 230 V

Main circuit breaker (UL)

Supply module ACS880- Size Type Data Qty Ordering code
304-…
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
1600 A, 600 V, 3P, 65 kA,
2430A-3+A004+A018 4×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 2 3AXD50000048327
UL
2000 A, 600 V, 3P, 65 kA,
3640A-3+A004+A018 4×D8T E2.2S-A 2000 2 3AXD50000048330
UL
1600 A, 600 V, 3P, 65 kA,
2430A-5+A004+A018 4×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 2 3AXD50000048327
UL
2000 A, 600 V, 3P, 65 kA,
3640A-5+A004+A018 4×D8T E2.2S-A 2000 2 3AXD50000048330
UL
1200 A, 600 V, 3P, 65 kA,
2130A-7+A004+A018 4×D8T E2.2S-A 1200 2 3AXD50000048328
UL
1600 A, 600 V, 3P, 65 kA,
3040A-7+A004+A018 4×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 2 3AXD50000048327
UL
3200A, 600 V, 3P, 100 kA,
5470A-3+A004+A018 6×D8T E6.2V-A 4000 2 3AXD50000048348
UL
3200 A, 600 V, 3P,
5470A-5+A004+A018 6×D8T E6.2V-A 4000 2 3AXD50000048348
100 kA, UL
2500 A, 600 V, 3P, 65 kA,
4560A-7+A004+A018 6×D8T E4.2S-A 2500 2 3AXD50000048343
UL

Content of the 12-pulse 230 V main circuit breakers

Ekip Dip LI 3p WMP 1SDA077658R1 (E2.2S-A 1600)
1SDA077668R1 (E2.2S-A 2000)
1SDA079128R1 (E6.2V-A 4000)
1SDA078458R1 (E4.2S-A 2500)
YO E1.2...E6.2 220-240 Vac/dc 1SDA073674R1
YC E1.2...E6.2 220-240 Vac/dc 1SDA073687R1
YU E1.2...E6.2 220-240 Vac/dc 1SDA073700R1
M E2.2...E6.2 220-250 Vac/dc 1SDA073725R1
MOC E2.2...E6.2 1SDA073781R1
AUX 6Q 400V E2.2...E6.2 1SDA073756R1
KLC-S Key lock open N.20005 E2.2...E6.2 1SDA073792R1
KLP-S Key lock racked in/out N.20005 E2.2...E6.2 1st 1SDA073807R1
key

TRIPLE CERTIFIC: UL/IEC/CCC 1SDA083022R1 (E2.2S)

1SDA083025RI (E4.2S)

Certificate not included in E4.2S 3200

 Ordering information 205

Wagon (UL)
Supply module
Type Data Qty Ordering code
ACS880-304-…
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
2430A-
3+A004+A018
3640A-
3+A004+A018
2430A-
5+A004+A018 E2.2-A_W_FP_2000HR-
3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 2 3AXD50000048354
3640A- HR_UL
5+A004+A018
2130A-
7+A004+A018
3040A-
7+A004+A018
5470A-
3+A004+A018 E6.2-A_W_FP_5000HR-
3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 2 3AXD50000048402
5470A- HR_UL
5+A004+A018
4560A- E4.2-A_W_FP_2500HR-
3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 2 3AXD50000039281
7+A004+A018 HR_UL

Content of the 12-pulse 230 V wagons

W FP lu=2000 3p HR HR UL / 1SDA079698R1 (E2.2-A_W_FP_2000)
W FP lu=2500 3p HR HR UL / 1SDA079700R1 (E4.2-A_W_FP_2500)
WAGON W FP lu=5000 HR HR UL 1SDA079706R1 (E6.2-A_W_FP_5000)
AUP 5 contacts 400V E2.2...E6.2 - left set 1SDA080373R1
206 Ordering information

￭ IEC main circuit breakers – 6-pulse 115 V

Main circuit breaker (IEC)

Supply module ACS880- Size Type Data Qty Ordering code
304-…
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
1210A-3+A018* 2×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 1600 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, 1 3AXD50000048329
UL
1820A-3+A018* 2×D8T E2.2S-A 2000 2000 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, 1 3AXD50000048342
UL
1210A-5+A018* 2×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 1600 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, 1 3AXD50000048329
UL
1820A-5+A018* 2×D8T E2.2S-A 2000 2000 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, 1 3AXD50000048342
UL
1520A-7+A018* 2×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 1600 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, 1 3AXD50000048329
UL
2730A-3+A018 3×D8T E4.2S 3200 3200 A, 690 V, 3P, 66 kA, 1 3AXD50000048341
IEC
2730A-5+A018 3×D8T E4.2S 3200 3200 A, 690 V, 3P, 66 kA, 1 3AXD50000048341
IEC
2280A-7+A018 3×D8T E4.2S-A 2500 2500 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, 1 3AXD50000048345
UL
3640A-3+A018 4×D8T E6.2V-A 4000 4000 A, 690 V, 3P, 1 3AXD50000048347
100 kA, UL
3640A-5+A018 4×D8T E6.2V-A 4000 4000 A, 690 V, 3P, 1 3AXD50000048347
100 kA, UL
3040A-7+A018 4×D8T E4.2S 3200 3200 A, 690 V, 3P, 66 kA, 1 3AXD50000048341
IEC
4560A-3+A018 5×D8T E6.2V-A 5000 5000 A, 690 V, 3P, 1 3AXD50000048349
100 kA, UL
4560A-5+A018 5×D8T E6.2V-A 5000 5000 A, 690 V, 3P, 1 3AXD50000048349
100 kA, UL
3800A-7+A018 5×D8T E6.2V-A 4000 4000 A, 690 V, 3P, 1 3AXD50000048347
100 kA, UL
5470A-3+A018 6×D8T E6.2V 6300 6300 A, 690 V, 3P, 1 3AXD50000048344
100 kA, IEC
5470A-5+A018 6×D8T E6.2V 6300 6300 A, 690 V, 3P, 1 3AXD50000048344
100 kA, IEC
4560A-7+A018 6×D8T E6.2V-A 5000 5000 A, 690 V, 3P, 1 3AXD50000048349
100 kA, UL

Content of the 6-pulse 115 V main circuit breakers

Ekip Dip LI 3p WMP 1SDA077658R1 (E2.2S-A 1600)
1SDA077668R1 (E2.2S-A 2000)
1SDA072501R1 (E4.2S 3200)
1SDA078458R1 (E4.2S-A 2500)
1SDA079128R1 (E6.2V-A 4000)
1SDA079138R1 (E6.2V-A 5000)
1SDA072651R1 (E6.2V 6300)
YO E1.2...E6.2 110-120 Vac/dc 1SDA073672R1
 Ordering information 207

Content of the 6-pulse 115 V main circuit breakers

YC E1.2...E6.2 110-120 Vac/dc 1SDA073685R1
YU E1.2...E6.2 110-120 Vac/dc 1SDA073698R1
M E1.2...E6.2 100-130 Vac/dc 1SDA073724R1
MOC E2.2...E6.2 1SDA073781R1
AUX 6Q 400V E2.2...E6.2 1SDA073756R1
KLC-S Key lock open N.20005 E2.2...E6.2 1st key 1SDA073792R1
KLP-S Key lock racked in/out N.20005 E2.2...E6.2 1st 1SDA073807R1
key

TRIPLE CERTIFIC: UL/IEC/CCC 1) 1SDA083022R1 (E2.2S)

1SDA083025R1 (E4.2S)
1SDA083028R1 (E6.2V)

1) Certificate not included in E4.2S 3200 and E6.2V 6300.

Wagon (IEC)
Supply module
Type Data Qty Ordering code
ACS880-304-…
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
1210A-3+A018*
1820A-3+A018*
1210A-5+A018* E2.2-A_W_FP_2000HR-HR_UL 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 1 3AXD50000048354
1820A-5+A018*
1520A-7+A018*
2730A-3+A018
E4.2_W_FP_3200_HR-HR_IEC 3-pole rear HR-HR term., IEC 1 3AXD50000048356
2730A-5+A018
2280A-7+A018 E4.2-A_W_FP_2500HR-HR_UL 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 1 3AXD50000039281
3640A-3+A018
E6.2-A_W_FP_5000HR-HR_UL 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 1 3AXD50000048402
3640A-5+A018
3040A-7+A018 E4.2_W_FP_3200_HR-HR_IEC 3-pole rear HR-HR term., IEC 1 3AXD50000048356
4560A-3+A018
4560A-5+A018 E6.2-A_W_FP_5000HR-HR_UL 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 1 3AXD50000048402
3800A-7+A018
5470A-3+A018
E6.2X_W_FP_6300_HR 3-pole rear HR-HR term., IEC 1 3AXD50000048353
5470A-5+A018
4560A-7+A018 E6.2-A_W_FP_5000HR-HR_UL 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 1 3AXD50000048402

Content of the 6-pulse 115 V wagons

W FP lu=2000 3p HR HR UL / 1SDA079698R1 (E2.2-A_W_FP_2000)
W FP lu=2500 3p HR HR UL / 1SDA079700R1 (E4.2-A_W_FP_2500)
WAGON W FP lu=5000 HR HR UL 1SDA079706R1 (E6.2-A_W_FP_5000)
AUP 5 contacts 400V E2.2...E6.2 - left set 1SDA080373R1
IEC-wagons E4.2_W_FP_3200 and E6.2X_W_FP_6300
W FP lu=3200 HR HR, IEC / 1SDA073913R1 (E4.2_W_FP_3200)
W FP lu=6300 or X version 3p HR HR 1SDA073920R1 (E6.2X_W_FP_6300)
208 Ordering information

Content of the 6-pulse 115 V wagons

AUP 5 contacts 400V E2.2...E6.2, IEC 1SDA073764R1

For adapting E2.2S-A, E4.2S-A and E6.2V-A air circuit breakers to IEC bus bars, use a bus
bar shim kit. See section IEC bus bar shim kit (page 214).

￭ UL/CSA main circuit breakers – 6-pulse 115 V

Main circuit breaker (UL)

Supply module Size Type Data Qty Ordering code
ACS880-304-…
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
1210A-3+A018 2×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 1600 A, 600 V, 3P, 65 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048329
1820A-3+A018 2×D8T E2.2S-A 2000 2000 A, 600 V, 3P, 65 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048342
1210A-5+A018 2×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 1600 A, 600 V, 3P, 65 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048329
1820A-5+A018 2×D8T E2.2S-A 2000 2000 A, 600 V, 3P, 65 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048342
1520A-7+A018 2×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 1600 A, 600 V, 3P, 65 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048329
2730A-3+A018 3×D8T E6.2V-A 4000 3200 A, 600 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048347
2730A-5+A018 3×D8T E6.2V-A 4000 3200 A, 600 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048347
2280A-7+A018 3×D8T E4.2S-A 2500 2500 A, 600 V, 3P, 65 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048345
3640A-3+A018 4×D8T E6.2V-A 4000 4000 A, 600 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048347
3640A-5+A018 4×D8T E6.2V-A 4000 4000 A, 600 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048347
3040A-7+A018 4×D8T E6.2V-A 4000 3200 A, 600 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048347
4560A-3+A018 5×D8T E6.2V-A 5000 5000 A, 600 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048349
4560A-5+A018 5×D8T E6.2V-A 5000 5000 A, 600 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048349
3800A-7+A018 5×D8T E6.2V-A 4000 4000 A, 600 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048347
4560A-7+A018 6×D8T E6.2V-A 5000 5000 A, 600 V, 3P, 100 kA, UL 1 3AXD50000048349

Content of the 6-pulse 115 V main circuit breakers

Ekip Dip LI 3p WMP 1SDA077658R1 (E2.2S-A 1600)
1SDA077668R1 (E2.2S-A 2000)
1SDA079128R1 (E6.2V-A 4000)
1SDA078458R1 (E4.2S-A 2500)
1SDA079138R1 (E6.2V-A 5000)
YO E1.2...E6.2 110-120 Vac/dc 1SDA073672R1
YC E1.2...E6.2 110-120 Vac/dc 1SDA073685R1
YU E1.2...E6.2 110-120 Vac/dc 1SDA073698R1
M E1.2...E6.2 100-130 Vac/dc 1SDA073724R1
MOC E2.2...E6.2 1SDA073781R1
AUX 6Q 400V E2.2...E6.2 1SDA073756R1
KLC-S Key lock open N.20005 E2.2...E6.2 1st key 1SDA073792R1
KLP-S Key lock racked in/out N.20005 E2.2...E6.2 1st 1SDA073807R1
key
 Ordering information 209

Content of the 6-pulse 115 V main circuit breakers

TRIPLE CERTIFIC: UL/IEC/CCC 1SDA083022R1 (E2.2S)

1SDA083025R1 (E4.2S)
1SDA083028R1 (E6.2V)

Certificate not included in E4.2S 3200 and E6.2V 6300.

Wagon (UL)
Supply module
Type Data Qty Ordering code
ACS880-304-…
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
1210A-3+A018
1820A-3+A018
1210A-5+A018 E2.2-A_W_FP_2000HR-HR_UL 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 1 3AXD50000048354
1820A-5+A018
1520A-7+A018
2730A-3+A018
E6.2-A_W_FP_5000HR-HR_UL 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 1 3AXD50000048402
2730A-5+A018
2280A-7+A018 E4.2-A_W_FP_2500HR-HR_UL 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 1 3AXD50000039281
3640A-3+A018
E6.2-A_W_FP_5000HR-HR_UL 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 1 3AXD50000048402
3640A-5+A018
3040A-7+A018 E6.2-A_W_FP_5000HR-HR_UL 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 1 3AXD50000048402
4560A-3+A018
4560A-5+A018
E6.2-A_W_FP_5000HR-HR_UL 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 1 3AXD50000048402
3800A-7+A018
4560A-7+A018

Content of the 6-pulse 115 V wagons

W FP lu=2000 3p HR HR UL / 1SDA079698R1 (E2.2-A_W_FP_2000)
W FP lu=2500 3p HR HR UL / 1SDA079700R1 (E4.2-A_W_FP_2500)
WAGON W FP lu=5000 HR HR UL 1SDA079706R1 (E6.2-A_W_FP_5000)
AUP 5 contacts 400V E2.2...E6.2 - left set 1SDA080373R1
210 Ordering information

￭ IEC main circuit breakers – 12-pulse 115 V

Main circuit breaker (IEC)

Supply module ACS880- Size Type Data Qty
Ordering code
304-…
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
2430A-3+A004+A018* 4×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 1600 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, 2
3AXD50000048329
UL
3640A-3+A004+A018* 4×D8T E2.2S-A 2000 2000 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, 2
3AXD50000048342
UL
2430A-5+A004+A018* 4×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 1600 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, 2
3AXD50000048329
UL
3640A-5+A004+A018* 4×D8T E2.2S-A 2000 2000 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, 2
3AXD50000048342
UL
2130A-7+A004+A018* 4×D8T E2.2S-A 1200 1200 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, 2
3AXD50000048351
UL
3040A-7+A004+A018* 4×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 1600 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, 2
3AXD50000048329
UL
5470A-3+A004+A018 6×D8T E4.2S 3200 3200 A, 690 V, 3P, 66 kA, 2
3AXD50000048341
IEC
5470A-5+A004+A018 6×D8T E4.2S 3200 3200 A, 690 V, 3P, 66 kA, 2
3AXD50000048341
IEC
4560A-7+A004+A018 6×D8T E4.2S-A 2500 2500 A, 690 V, 3P, 65 kA, 2
3AXD50000048345
UL

Content of the 12-pulse 115 V main circuit breakers

Ekip Dip LI 3p WMP 1SDA077658R1 (E2.2S-A 1600)
1SDA077668R1 (E2.2S-A 2000)
1SDA072501R1 (E4.2S 3200)
1SDA078458R1 (E4.2S-A 2500)
YO E1.2...E6.2 110-120 Vac/dc 1SDA073672R1
YC E1.2...E6.2 110-120 Vac/dc 1SDA073685R1
YU E1.2...E6.2 110-120 Vac/dc 1SDA073698R1
M E1.2...E6.2 100-130 Vac/dc 1SDA073724R1
MOC E2.2...E6.2 1SDA073781R1
AUX 6Q 400V E2.2...E6.2 1SDA073756R1
KLC-S Key lock open N.20005 E2.2...E6.2 1st key 1SDA073792R1
KLP-S Key lock racked in/out N.20005 E2.2...E6.2 1st 1SDA073807R1
key

TRIPLE CERTIFIC: UL/IEC/CCC 1) 1SDA083022R1 (E2.2S)

1SDA083025R1 (E4.2S)

1) Certificate not included in E4.2S 3200.

For adapting E2.2S-A, E4.2S-A and E6.2V-A air circuit breakers to IEC bus bars, use a bus
bar shim kit. See section IEC bus bar shim kit (page 214).
 Ordering information 211

Wagon (IEC)
Supply module
Type Data Qty Ordering code
ACS880-304-…
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
2430A-
3+A004+A018*
3640A-
3+A004+A018*
2430A-
5+A004+A018* E2.2-A_W_FP_2000HR-
3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 2 3AXD50000048354
3640A- HR_UL
5+A004+A018*
2130A-
7+A004+A018*
3040A-
7+A004+A018*
5470A-3+A004+A018 E4.2_W_FP_3200_HR-
3-pole rear HR-HR term., IEC 2 3AXD50000048356
5470A-5+A004+A018 HR_IEC

E4.2-A_W_FP_2500HR-
4560A-7+A004+A018 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 2 3AXD50000039281
HR_UL

Content of the 12-pulse 115 V wagons

W FP lu=2000 3p HR HR UL / 1SDA079698R1 (E2.2-A_W_FP_2000)
W FP lu=2500 3p HR HR UL 1SDA079700R1 (E4.2-A_W_FP_2500)
AUP 5 contacts 400V E2.2...E6.2 - left set 1SDA080373R1
IEC-wagon E4.2_W_FP_3200
W FP lu=3200 HR HR, IEC 1SDA073913R1 (E4.2_W_FP_3200)
AUP 5 contacts 400V E2.2...E6.2, IEC 1SDA073764R1

For adapting E2.2S-A, E4.2S-A and E6.2V-A air circuit breakers to IEC bus bars, use a bus
bar shim kit. See section IEC bus bar shim kit (page 214).
212 Ordering information

￭ UL/CSA main circuit breakers – 12-pulse 115 V

Main circuit breaker (UL)

Supply module ACS880- Size Type Data Qty Ordering code
304-…
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
2430A-3+A004+A018 4×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 1600°A, 600°V, 3P, 65°kA, 2 3AXD50000048329
UL
3640A-3+A004+A018 4×D8T E2.2S-A 2000 2000°A, 600°V, 3P, 65°kA, 2 3AXD50000048342
UL
2430A-5+A004+A018 4×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 1600°A, 600°V, 3P, 65°kA, 2 3AXD50000048329
UL
3640A-5+A004+A018 4×D8T E2.2S-A 2000 2000°A, 600°V, 3P, 65°kA, 2 3AXD50000048342
UL
2130A-7+A004+A018 4×D8T E2.2S-A 1200 1200°A, 600°V, 3P, 65°kA, 2 3AXD50000048351
UL
3040A-7+A004+A018 4×D8T E2.2S-A 1600 1600°A, 600°V, 3P, 65°kA, 2 3AXD50000048329
UL
5470A-3+A004+A018 6×D8T E6.2V-A 4000 3200°A, 600°V, 3P, 2 3AXD50000048347
100°kA, UL
5470A-5+A004+A018 6×D8T E6.2V-A 4000 3200°A, 600°V, 3P, 2 3AXD50000048347
100°kA, UL
4560A-7+A004+A018 6×D8T E4.2S-A 2500 2500°A, 600°V, 3P, 65°kA, 2 3AXD50000048345
UL

Content of the 12-pulse 115°V main circuit breakers

Ekip Dip LI 3p WMP 1SDA077658R1 (E2.2S-A 1600)
1SDA077668R1 (E2.2S-A 2000)
1SDA077648R1 (E2.2S-A 1200)
1SDA079128R1 (E6.2V-A 4000)
1SDA078458R1 (E4.2S-A 2500)
YO E1.2...E6.2 110-120 Vac/dc 1SDA073672R1
YC E1.2...E6.2 110-120 Vac/dc 1SDA073685R1
YU E1.2...E6.2 110-120 Vac/dc 1SDA073698R1
M E1.2...E6.2 100-130 Vac/dc 1SDA073724R1
MOC E2.2...E6.2 1SDA073781R1
AUX 6Q 400V E2.2...E6.2 1SDA073756R1
KLC-S Key lock open N.20005 E2.2...E6.2 1st key 1SDA073792R1
KLP-S Key lock racked in/out N.20005 E2.2...E6.2 1st 1SDA073807R1
key

TRIPLE CERTIFIC: UL/IEC/CCC 1SDA083022R1 (E2.2S)

1SDA083025R1 (E4.2S)
1SDA083028R1 (E6.2V)

Certificate not included in E4.2S 3200.

 Ordering information 213

Wagon (UL)
Supply module
Type Data Qty Ordering code
ACS880-304-…
UN = 400 V, 500 V, 690 V
2430A-3+A004+A018
3640A-3+A004+A018
2430A-5+A004+A018 E2.2-A_W_FP_2000HR-
3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 2 3AXD50000048354
3640A-5+A004+A018 HR_UL

2130A-7+A004+A018
3040A-7+A004+A018
5470A-3+A004+A018 E6.2-A_W_FP_5000HR-
3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 2 3AXD50000048402
5470A-5+A004+A018 HR_UL

E4.2-A_W_FP_2500HR-
4560A-7+A004+A018 3-pole rear HR-HR term., UL 2 3AXD50000039281
HR_UL

Content of the 12-pulse 115°V wagons

W FP lu=2000 3p HR HR UL / 1SDA079698R1 (E2.2-A_W_FP_2000)
W FP lu=2500 3p HR HR UL / 1SDA079700R1 (E4.2-A_W_FP_2500)
WAGON W FP lu=5000 HR HR UL 1SDA079706R1 (E6.2-A_W_FP_5000)
AUP 5 contacts 400V E2.2...E6.2 - left set 1SDA080373R1
214 Ordering information

￭ IEC bus bar shim kit

The following shim kits are available for adapting E2.2S-A, E4.2S-A and E6.2V-A air circuit
breakers to IEC bus bars.

Type Data Ordering code Illustration

EMAX2 E2.2 busbar

E2.2S-A 3AXD50000286324
shim kit

Instruction code: 3AXD50000286072

EMAX2 E4.2 busbar

E4.2S-A 3AXD50000286782
shim kit

Instruction code: 3AXD50000286973

EMAX2 E6.2 bus bar

E6.2V-A 3AXD50000287369
shim kit

Instruction code: 3AXD50000287468

￭ Main circuit breaker and wagon cover

One cover is needed for each main circuit breaker/wagon pair. For further details regarding
arc protection, see Drive modules cabinet design and construction instructions
(3AUA0000107668 [English]).

Type Description Ordering code

IEC IP54 flange, key N.200005 E2.2…E6.2, 1SDA073869R1 3AXD50000049760

UL Hinged window, APWK2016H 3AUA0000222786

 Ordering information 215

Control panel
„
The control panel is not included with the module but must be ordered separately. One
control panel is required for the commissioning of an ACS880 drive system, even if the Drive
composer PC tool is used.
The control panel can be flush mounted on the cabinet door with the help of a door mounting
kit. For more information on the control panel, see ACX-AP-x assistant control panels user’s
manual (3AUA0000085685 [English]).

Type Description Ordering code Illustration

ACS-AP-W Control panel with Bluetooth 3AXD50000025965

DPMP-01 Door mounting kit (IP55) 3AUA0000108878

DPMP-02 Door mounting kit (IP65) 3AXD50000009374

RJ45
216 Ordering information

For more information on the door mounting kits, such as the contents of the kit, see the
installation manuals:
• DPMP-01 mounting platform for control panels installation guide (3AUA0000100140
[English])
• DPMP-02/03 mounting platform for control panels installations guide (3AUA0000136205
[English]).

Ventilation kits
￭ Air inlet
„ kits
Air inlet kits 400 mm cabinet

Used with … Qty Ordering code Kit code Illustration

IP20 1 3AUA0000117002 A-4-X-021

Instruction code: 3AUA0000116879

IP42 1 3AUA0000117007 A-4-X-024

Instruction code: 3AUA0000116873

 Ordering information 217

Used with … Qty Ordering code Kit code Illustration

IP54 1 3AXD50000009184 A-4-X-027

Instruction code:
3AXD50000009989

Air inlet kits 600 mm cabinet

Used with … Qty Ordering code Kit code Illustration

IP20 1 3AUA0000117003 A-6-X-022

Instruction code: 3AUA0000116880

IP42 1 3AUA0000117008 A-6-X-025

Instruction code: 3AUA0000116874

218 Ordering information

Used with … Qty Ordering code Kit code Illustration

IP54 1 3AXD50000009185 A-6-X-028

Instruction code:
3AXD50000009990

Air inlet kits 800 mm cabinet

Used with … Qty Ordering code Kit code Illustration

IP20 1 3AUA0000117005 A-8-X-023

Instruction code: 3AUA0000116887

IP42 1 3AUA0000117009 A-8-X-026

Instruction code: 3AUA0000116875

IP54 1 3AXD50000009186 A-8-X-029

Instruction code:
3AXD50000010001
 Ordering information 219

￭ Air outlet kits

Air outlet kits 400 mm cabinet

Used with … Qty Ordering code Kit code Illustration

IP20 (IEC) 1 3AUA0000125203 A-4-X-042

Instruction code:
3AXD50000001983

IP42 (IEC) 1 3AUA0000114968 A-4-X-040

Instruction code: 3AUA0000115292

IP54 (IEC) 1 3AXD50000009187 A-4-X-064

Instruction code:
3AXD50000010284

Note: Fan to be ordered separ-

ately

IP54 (UL) 1 3AXD50000010362 A-4-X-067

Instruction code:
3AXD50000010284

Note: Fan to be ordered separ-

ately
220 Ordering information

Air outlet kits 600 mm cabinet

Used with … Qty Ordering code Kit code Illustration

IP20 (IEC) 1 3AUA0000125204 A-6-X-043

Instruction code:
3AXD50000001981

IP42 (IEC) 1 3AUA0000114789 A-6-X-041

Instruction code: 3AUA0000115166

IP54 (IEC) 1 3AXD50000009189 A-6-X-065

Instruction code:
3AXD50000010004

Note: Fan to be ordered separ-

ately

IP54 (UL) 1 3AXD50000010327 A-6-X-066

Instruction code:
3AXD50000010004

Note: Fan to be ordered separ-

ately
 Ordering information 221

￭ Cooling fans
One or two cooling fans are to be installed inside the air outlet compartment to ensure
sufficient cooling of the cabinet.

IEC/UL
Enclosure / Degree of Component
protection Qty Ordering code
(Auxiliary voltage) Name Data

1.1 A; 230 V; 240 W; 50 Hz

Fan 1 3AXD50000006934
1.45 A; 230 V; 350 W; 60 Hz
400 mm / IP54 Capacitor 6 μF, 600 V 1 3AXD50000006959
(230 V, 50/60 Hz)
Connector PLUG; 12 AWG; 2.50 mm2 1 3AXD50000000723
Connector SOCKET; 12 AWG; 2.50 mm2 1 3AXD50000000724
2.3 A; 230 V; 540 W; 50 Hz
Fan 1 3AXD50000006111
3 A; 230 V; 690 W; 60 Hz
600 mm / IP54 Capacitor 12 μF, 600 V 1 3AXD50000006885
(230 V, 50/60 Hz)
Connector PLUG; 12 AWG; 2.50 mm2 1 3AXD50000000723
Connector SOCKET; 12 AWG; 2.50 mm2 1 3AXD50000000724

UL/CSA
Enclosure / Degree of Component
protection Qty Ordering code
(Auxiliary voltage) Name Data

3.1 A; 115 V; 300 W; 50 Hz

Fan 1 64750062
3.9 A; 115 V; 430 W; 60 Hz
400 mm / IP54 Capacitor 25 μF; 220 V 1 68713188
(115 V, 50/60 Hz)
Connector PLUG; 12 AWG; 2.50 mm2 1 3AXD50000000723
Connector SOCKET; 12 AWG; 2.50 mm2 1 3AXD50000000724
Fan 6.3 A; 115 V; 680 W; 60 Hz 1 64750038

600 mm / IP54 Capacitor 25 μF; 220 V 1 68713188

(115 V, 50/60 Hz) Connector PLUG; 12 AWG; 2.50 mm2 1 3AXD50000000723
Connector SOCKET; 12 AWG; 2.50 mm2 1 3AXD50000000724

Miscellaneous
￭ Lifting device for the D7T supply module
Use the lifting device when replacing a frame D7T module in ABB drives ACx enclosure or
in the Rittal VX25 enclosure. See also section Replacing the D7T supply module (page 137).

Frame size Enclosure Qty Ordering code Instruction code

D7T Rittal VX25 1 3AXD50000439997 3AXD50000210268
D7T ABB drives ACx enclosure 1 3AXD50000047447 3AXD50000210268
222 Ordering information

￭ Pull-out ramp for the D8T supply module

Use the pull-out ramp when you remove or install a D8T module from or in the Rittal VX25
enclosure. Do not use the ramp with plinth heights over 100 mm (3.93 in) (the standard
plinth height of Rittal VX25 enclosures). For the dimension drawing, see section Dimensions
of the pull-out ramp for D8T module (page 257).

Frame size Enclosure Qty Ordering code Instruction code

D8T 400 mm (15.75 in) 1 A-468-8-304 3AUA0000120467

￭ Bracket for Rittal Flat-PLS busbar holder (common AC)

If you use the Rittal Flat-PLS system, you can use this kit for correct positioning of the
common AC bus in the Rittal VX25 enclosure.
Note: The designs presented in this manual for Rittal VX25 enclosures employ the Rittal
Flat-PLS busbar system. Make sure that the current carrying capability of the busbars is
not exceeded at any point of the drive system.

Used with… Qty Ordering code Kit code Illustration

400/600/800 mm
(15.75/23.62/31.50 in) VX25 1 3AXD50000360772 A-468-X-011-VX
enclosure

Instruction code: 3AXD50000372782

 Ordering information 223

￭ DC bus installation parts (for Rittal VX25 enclosures)

The brackets in this kit act as a mounting base for the busbar supports of the Rittal Flat-PLS
DC bus and ensure its correct placement and alignment inside the cabinet line-up.
The designs shown in this manual for Rittal VX25 enclosures use the Rittal Flat-PLS busbar
system. Make sure that the current in the drive system does not exceed the current-carrying
capacity of the busbars.

Used with … Qty Ordering code Kit code Illustration

1 kit per
VX25 enclosure 3AXD50000333387 A-468-X-001-VX
cubicle

Instruction code:
3AXD50000333639

￭ RFI filters
The RFI filter is used for improving the EMC characteristics of the unit and to fulfill category
C2 requirements. The RFI filter can be used in a grounded TN-S network. See ACS880
multidrive cabinets and modules electrical planning instructions (3AUA0000102324 [English]).

RFI filter Assembly kit for toroid

ACS880-304-...
Type Data Qty Ordering code Type Qty Ordering code
UN = 400 V
0650A-3+A018 B84143B Assembly kit in-
1250 A,
1 3AXD50000009256 cluding 20 μH 1 3AUA0000094324
0980A-3+A018 1250S080 500 V
toroid
UN = 500 V
0650A-5+A018 B84143B Assembly kit in-
1250 A,
1 3AXD50000009256 cluding 20 μH 1 3AUA0000094324
0980A-5+A018 1250S080 500 V
toroid

For dimension drawing, see section RFI filter and related accessories (page 276).
224
 Technical data 225

10
Technical data

Contents of this chapter

This chapter contains the technical data for ACS880-304…+A018 diode supply modules.

Ratings
ACS880-304-… Nominal ratings No overload use Light overload Heavy-duty use
use
I1 I2 Imax SN PN ILd PLd IHd PHd
A (AC) A (DC) A (DC) kVA KW A (DC) kW A (DC) kW
(DC) (DC)
UN = 400 V
6-pulse
0650A-3+A018 653 800 1120 452 432 768 415 598 323
0980A-3+A018 980 1200 1680 679 648 1152 622 898 485
1210A-3+A018 1215 1488 2083 842 804 1428 771 1113 601
1820A-3+A018 1823 2232 3125 1263 1205 2143 1157 1670 902
2730A-3+A018 2734 3348 4687 1894 1808 3214 1736 2504 1352
3640A-3+A018 3645 4464 6250 2525 2411 4285 2314 3339 1803
4560A-3+A018 4557 5580 7812 3157 3013 5357 2893 4174 2254
5470A-3+A018 5468 6696 9374 3788 3616 6428 3471 5009 2705
12-pulse
0910A-3+A004+A018 912 1116 1562 632 625 1071 600 835 467
1210A-3+A004+A018 1215 1488 2083 842 833 1428 800 1113 623
1820A-3+A004+A018 1823 2232 3125 1263 1250 2143 1200 1670 935
2430A-3+A004+A018 2430 2976 4166 1684 1667 2857 1600 2226 1247
226 Technical data

ACS880-304-… Nominal ratings No overload use Light overload Heavy-duty use

use
I1 I2 Imax SN PN ILd PLd IHd PHd
A (AC) A (DC) A (DC) kVA KW A (DC) kW A (DC) kW
(DC) (DC)
3640A-3+A004+A018 3645 4464 6250 2525 2500 4285 2400 3339 1870
5470A-3+A004+A018 5468 6696 9374 3788 3750 6428 3600 5009 2805
UN = 500 V
6-pulse
0650A-5+A018 653 800 1120 566 540 768 518 598 404
0980A-5+A018 980 1200 1680 849 810 1152 778 898 606
1210A-5+A018 1215 1488 2083 1052 1004 1428 964 1113 751
1820A-5+A018 1823 2232 3125 1579 1507 2143 1446 1670 1127
2730A-5+A018 2734 3348 4687 2368 2260 3214 2170 2504 1690
3650A-5+A018 3645 4464 6250 3157 3013 4285 2893 3339 2254
4560A-5+A018 4557 5580 7812 3946 3767 5357 3616 4174 2817
5470A-5+A018 5468 6696 9374 4735 4520 6428 4339 5009 3381
12-pulse
0910A-5+A004+A018 912 1116 1562 790 781 1071 750 835 584
1210A-5+A004+A018 1215 1488 2083 1052 1042 1428 1000 1113 779
1820A-5+A004+A018 1823 2232 3125 1579 1562 2143 1500 1670 1169
2430A-5+A004+A018 2430 2976 4166 2104 2083 2857 2000 2226 1558
3650A-5+A004+A018 3645 4464 6250 3157 3125 4285 3000 3339 2337
5470A-5+A004+A018 5468 6696 9374 4735 4687 6428 4500 5009 3506
UN = 690 V
6-pulse
0570A-7+A018 572 700 980 684 652 672 626 524 488
0820A-7+A018 817 1000 1400 976 932 960 894 748 697
1060A-7+A018 1064 1302 1823 1272 1213 1250 1164 974 907
1520A-7+A018 1519 1860 2604 1815 1733 1786 1663 1391 1296
2280A-7+A018 2279 2790 3906 2724 2599 2678 2495 2087 1944
3040A-7+A018 3038 3720 5208 3631 3465 3571 3327 2783 2592
3800A-7+A018 3797 4650 6510 4538 4331 4464 4158 3478 3240
4560A-7+A018 4557 5580 7812 5446 5198 5357 4990 4174 3888
12-pulse
0760A-7+A004+A018 760 930 1302 908 898 893 862 696 672
1060A-7+A004+A018 1064 1302 1823 1272 1258 1250 1207 974 941
1520A-7+A004+A018 1519 1860 2604 1815 1797 1786 1725 1391 1344
2130A-7+A004+A018 2127 2604 3646 2542 2515 2500 2415 1948 1882
3040A-7+A004+A018 3038 3720 5208 3631 3594 3571 3450 2783 2688
4560A-7+A004+A018 4557 5580 7812 5446 5390 5357 5175 4174 4032
 Technical data 227

Definitions
Nominal ratings
UN Nominal input voltage
I1 Continuous rms input (AC) current. No overload capability at 40 °C (104 °F).
I2 Continuous output (DC) current. No overload capability at 40 °C (104 °F).
Imax Maximum output current
SN Nominal apparent power
PN Nominal output power
Light-overload use (10% overload capability) ratings
ILd Continuous current. 10% overload is allowed for one minute every 5 minutes.
PLd Output power in light-overload use
Heavy-duty use (40% overload capability) ratings
IHd Continuous current. 40% overload is allowed for one minute every 5 minutes.
PHd Output power in heavy-duty use
Note:
• The ratings apply to units without option +C132 (marine approval). For ratings of units
with option +C132, see ACS880 +C132 marine type-approved drive modules and
module packages supplement (3AXD50000037752 [English]).

￭ Derating
Surrounding air temperature derating
In the temperature range +40…50 °C (+104…122 °F), the rated output current is derated
by 1 percentage point for every added 1 °C (1.8 °F). The output current can be calculated
by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor (k):
k

1.00

0.90

0.80
+40 °C +50 °C T
+104 °F +122 °F

Altitude derating
At altitudes 1000 … 2000 m (3281 … 6562 ft) above sea level, the output must be derated
for 1% for every 100 m (328 ft). For derating at altitudes over 2000 m (6561.7 ft), contact
ABB.
228 Technical data

Type equivalence table and frame sizes

Module type Basic module type Frame size
UN = 400 V
6-pulse
ACS880-304-0650A-3+A018 ACS880-304-0650A-3+A018 D8T
ACS880-304-0980A-3+A018 ACS880-304-0980A-3+A018 D8T
ACS880-304-1210A-3+A018 ACS880-304-0650A-3+A018 2xD8T
ACS880-304-1820A-3+A018 ACS880-304-0980A-3+A018 2xD8T
ACS880-304-2730A-3+A018 ACS880-304-0980A-3+A018 3xD8T
ACS880-304-3640A-3+A018 ACS880-304-0980A-3+A018 4xD8T
ACS880-304-4560A-3+A018 ACS880-304-0980A-3+A018 5xD8T
ACS880-304-5470A-3+A018 ACS880-304-0980A-3+A018 6xD8T
12-pulse
ACS880-304-0910A-3+A004+A018 ACS880-304-0490A-3+A018 2xD7T
ACS880-304-1210A-3+A004+A018 ACS880-304-0650A-3+A018 2xD8T
ACS880-304-1820A-3+A004+A018 ACS880-304-0980A-3+A018 2xD8T
ACS880-304-2430A-3+A004+A018 ACS880-304-0650A-3+A018 4xD8T
ACS880-304-3640A-3+A004+A018 ACS880-304-0980A-3+A018 4xD8T
ACS880-304-5470A-3+A004+A018 ACS880-304-0980A-3+A018 6xD8T
UN = 500 V
6-pulse
ACS880-304-0650A-5+A018 ACS880-304-0650A-5+A018 D8T
ACS880-304-0980A-5+A018 ACS880-304-0980A-5+A018 D8T
ACS880-304-1210A-5+A018 ACS880-304-0650A-5+A018 2xD8T
ACS880-304-1820A-5+A018 ACS880-304-0980A-5+A018 2xD8T
ACS880-304-2730A-5+A018 ACS880-304-0980A-5+A018 3xD8T
ACS880-304-3640A-5+A018 ACS880-304-0980A-5+A018 4xD8T
ACS880-304-4560A-5+A018 ACS880-304-0980A-5+A018 5xD8T
ACS880-304-5470A-5+A018 ACS880-304-0980A-5+A018 6xD8T
12-pulse
ACS880-304-0910A-5+A004+A018 ACS880-304-0490A-5+A018 2xD7T
ACS880-304-1210A-5+A004+A018 ACS880-304-0650A-5+A018 2xD8T
ACS880-304-1820A-5+A004+A018 ACS880-304-0980A-5+A018 2xD8T
ACS880-304-2430A-5+A004+A018 ACS880-304-0650A-5+A018 4xD8T
ACS880-304-3640A-5+A004+A018 ACS880-304-0980A-5+A018 4xD8T
ACS880-304-5470A-5+A004+A018 ACS880-304-0980A-5+A018 6xD8T
UN = 690 V
6-pulse
ACS880-304-0570A-7+A018 ACS880-304-0570A-7+A018 D8T
ACS880-304-0820A-7+A018 ACS880-304-0820A-7+A018 D8T
ACS880-304-1060A-7+A018 ACS880-304-0570A-7+A018 2xD8T
ACS880-304-1520A-7+A018 ACS880-304-0820A-7+A018 2xD8T
 Technical data 229

Module type Basic module type Frame size

ACS880-304-2280A-7+A018 ACS880-304-0820A-7+A018 3xD8T
ACS880-304-3040A-7+A018 ACS880-304-0820A-7+A018 4xD8T
ACS880-304-3800A-7+A018 ACS880-304-0820A-7+A018 5xD8T
ACS880-304-4560A-7+A018 ACS880-304-0820A-7+A018 6xD8T
12-pulse
ACS880-304-0760A-7+A004+A018 ACS880-304-0410A-7+A018 2xD7T
ACS880-304-1060A-7+A004+A018 ACS880-304-0570A-7+A018 2xD8T
ACS880-304-1520A-7+A004+A018 ACS880-304-0820A-7+A018 2xD8T
ACS880-304-2130A-7+A004+A018 ACS880-304-0570A-7+A018 4xD8T
ACS880-304-3040A-7+A004+A018 ACS880-304-0820A-7+A018 4xD8T
ACS880-304-4560A-7+A004+A018 ACS880-304-0820A-7+A018 6xD8T

Fuses
￭ AC fuses
There must always be the main AC fuses in the supply unit. If there are parallel modules
after the main AC fuses, there must also be separate module-specific AC fuses for each
module. For the AC fuse types and ordering codes, see section AC fuses (page 193). For
the locations of the AC fuses in the main circuit, see the overview diagrams.
ABB recommends forced cooling for the AC fuses to keep the fuse temperature under
100 °C (212 °F).
• When the AC fuses are located in the module cubicle, the cooling fan of the module
cools also the fuses.
• When located in another cabinet (example, in incoming cubicle), use an extra fan. Install
the fan in such a way that it directly cools the fuses.
ABB also recommends that you monitor the cooling fan status or fuse temperature.

￭ Supply module internal DC fuses

Each supply module has internal DC fuses.
Note: You can use fuses from other manufacturers if they meet the ratings and the melting
curve of the fuse does not exceed the melting curve of the fuse in the table.

Supply module DC fuses in each supply module

frame size and op- IN I2t UN
tions Manufacturer Type Qty
A A2s V
D7T 700 755000 1000 Bussmann 170M4908 2
D8T (IEC) 900 1750000* 1100 Bussmann 170M5499 4
D8T +C129+C134 1800 7600000 1250 Bussmann 170M6783 2
(UL/CSA)

* Clearing value at 1000 V DC.

230 Technical data

Dimensions and weights

Module type Height Width Depth Weight
mm inch mm inch mm inch kg lbs
UN = 400 V
6-pulse
ACS880-304-0650A-3+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 180 397
ACS880-304-0980A-3+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 180 397
ACS880-304-1210A-3+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 360 794
ACS880-304-1820A-3+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 360 794
ACS880-304-2730A-3+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 540 1191
ACS880-304-3640A-3+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 720 1587
ACS880-304-4560A-3+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 900 1984
ACS880-304-5470A-3+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 1080 2381
12-pulse
ACS880-304-0910A-3+A004+A018 1054 41.50 170 6.69 417 16.42 160 353
ACS880-304-1210A-3+A004+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 360 794
ACS880-304-1820A-3+A004+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 360 794
ACS880-304-2430A-3+A004+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 720 1587
ACS880-304-3640A-3+A004+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 720 1587
ACS880-304-5470A-3+A004+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 1080 2381
UN = 500 V
6-pulse
ACS880-304-0650A-5+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 180 397
ACS880-304-0980A-5+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 180 397
ACS880-304-1210A-5+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 360 794
ACS880-304-1820A-5+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 360 794
ACS880-304-2730A-5+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 540 1191
ACS880-304-3640A-5+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 720 1587
ACS880-304-4560A-5+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 900 1984
ACS880-304-5470A-5+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 1080 2381
12-pulse
ACS880-304-0910A-5+A004+A018 1054 41.50 170 6.69 417 16.42 160 353
ACS880-304-1210A-5+A004+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 360 794
ACS880-304-1820A-5+A004+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 360 794
ACS880-304-2430A-5+A004+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 720 1587
ACS880-304-3640A-5+A004+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 720 1587
ACS880-304-5470A-5+A004+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 1080 2381
UN = 690 V
6-pulse
ACS880-304-0570A-7+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 180 397
ACS880-304-0820A-7+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 180 397
ACS880-304-1060A-7+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 360 794
 Technical data 231

Module type Height Width Depth Weight

mm inch mm inch mm inch kg lbs
ACS880-304-1520A-7+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 360 794
ACS880-304-2280A-7+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 540 1191
ACS880-304-3040A-7+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 720 1587
ACS880-304-3800A-7+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 900 1984
ACS880-304-4560A-7+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 1080 2381
12-pulse
ACS880-304-0760A-7+A004+A018 1054 41.50 170 6.69 417 16.42 160 353
ACS880-304-1060A-7+A004+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 360 794
ACS880-304-1520A-7+A004+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 360 794
ACS880-304-2130A-7+A004+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 720 1587
ACS880-304-3040A-7+A004+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 720 1587
ACS880-304-4560A-7+A004+A018 1397 55.00 240 9.45 589 23.19 1080 2381

Free space requirements

Frame size Above Front Left Right
mm in mm in mm in mm in
D8T 200 7.87 10 0.39 10 0.39 10 0.39
D7T 150 6 25 1 25 1 25 1

Above Free space to enable cooling air flow

Front Free space for cabling
Left Free space for smooth installation
Right Free space for smooth installation

Allowable mounting orientations

The modules must be mounted upright unless other orientations are expressly allowed
below.
D7T modules: Installation on left-hand side (viewed from the front) allowed.
232 Technical data

D8T modules: Installation on left-hand side (viewed from the front) allowed.

Losses, cooling data and noise

ACS880-304-… Losses Air flow Efficiency Noise level
kW m3/h ft3/min % dB

UN = 400 V
6-pulse
0650A-3+A018 4.6 1300 765 99.0 72
0980A-3+A018 6.6 1300 765 99.0 72
1210A-3+A018 9.2 2600 1530 98.9 74
1820A-3+A018 13.3 2600 1530 99.0 74
2730A-3+A018 19.9 3900 2296 99.0 76
3640A-3+A018 26.6 5200 3061 99.0 76
4560A-3+A018 33.3 6500 3826 99.0 77
5470A-3+A018 40.0 7800 4591 99.0 78
12-pulse
0910A-3+A004+A018 8.4 1800 1059 98.7 74
1210A-3+A004+A018 9.2 2600 1530 98.9 74
1820A-3+A004+A018 13.3 2600 1530 99.0 74
2430A-3+A004+A018 18.4 5200 3061 98.9 76
3640A-3+A004+A018 26.6 5200 3061 99.0 76
5470A-3+A004+A018 40.0 7800 4591 99.0 78
UN = 500 V
6-pulse
0650A-5+A018 4.6 1300 765 99.2 72
0980A-5+A018 6.6 1300 765 99.2 72
1210A-5+A018 9.2 2600 1530 99.1 74
1820A-5+A018 13.3 2600 1530 99.2 74
2730A-5+A018 19.9 3900 2296 99.2 76
3640A-5+A018 26.6 5200 3061 99.2 76
4560A-5+A018 33.3 6500 3826 99.2 77
5470A-5+A018 40.0 7800 4591 99.2 78
12-pulse
0910A-5+A004+A018 8.4 1800 1059 99.0 74
1210A-5+A004+A018 9.2 2600 1530 99.1 74
1820A-5+A004+A018 13.3 2600 1530 99.2 74
 Technical data 233

ACS880-304-… Losses Air flow Efficiency Noise level

kW m3/h ft3/min % dB

2430A-5+A004+A018 18.4 5200 3061 99.1 76

3640A-5+A004+A018 26.6 5200 3061 99.2 76
5470A-5+A004+A018 40.0 7800 4591 99.2 78
UN = 690 V
6-pulse
0570A-7+A018 4.5 1300 765 99.3 72
0820A-7+A018 5.8 1300 765 99.4 72
1060A-7+A018 9.0 2600 1530 99.3 74
1520A-7+A018 12.7 2600 1530 99.3 74
2280A-7+A018 19.1 3900 2296 99.3 76
3040A-7+A018 25.5 5200 3061 99.3 76
3800A-7+A018 32.0 6500 3826 99.3 77
4560A-7+A018 38.4 7800 4591 99.3 78
12-pulse
0760A-7+A004+A018 7.7 1800 1059 99.2 74
1060A-7+A004+A018 9.0 2600 1530 99.3 74
1520A-7+A004+A018 12.7 2600 1530 99.3 74
2130A-7+A004+A018 18.1 5200 3061 99.3 76
3040A-7+A004+A018 25.5 5200 3061 99.3 76
4560A-7+A004+A018 38.4 7800 4591 99.3 78

Note: These losses are not calculated according to the ecodesign standard IEC 61800-9-2.

Auxiliary circuit current/power consumption

UN f Icont Istart Pcont
Device
V Hz A A W
BCU control unit 24 V DC ±10% - 2.0 - 48
230 V AC (+15%/-
50/60 0.45 - 105
D7T/D8T module: internal 20%)
electronics 115 V AC (+15%/-
50/60 0.90 - 105
20%)
115 V AC 50 2.4 2.4 -

D7T module: direct-on-line 115 V AC 60 2.4 2.4 -

fan (option +C188) 230 V AC 50 1.4 1.4 -
230 V AC 60 1.4 1.4 -

D8T module: direct-on-line 400 V AC 50 1.50 3.00 -

fan (option +C188) 400 V AC 60 1.90 3.80 -
234 Technical data

UN f Icont Istart Pcont

Device
V Hz A A W

D8T module: heating ele- 230 V AC 50/60 - - 40

ment (option +C183) 115 V AC 60 - - 40

UN Nominal voltage
f Supply frequency
Icont Calculated continuous load current
Istart Calculated load current at start
Pcont Continuous input power

￭ Cooling fans

UN f Icont
Cabinet fans Enclosure width
V AC Hz A

IP54 roof fan 50 1.10

400 mm 230
IEC/UL 60 1.45
IP54 roof fan 50 2.30
600 mm 230
IEC/UL 60 3.00
IP54 roof fan 50 3.1
400 mm 115
UL/CSA 60 3.9
IP54 roof fan 50 5.5
600 mm 115
UL/CSA 60 6.3

f Supply frequency
Icont Calculated continuous load current
UN Nominal voltage
 Technical data 235

Typical power cable sizes

The tables below give current carrying capacity (ILmax) for aluminum and copper PVC/XLPE
insulated cables. A correction factor K = 0.70 is used. Time const is the temperature time
constant of the cable.
The cable sizing is based on max. 9 cables laid on the cable trays side by side, three ladder
type trays one on top of the other, ambient temperature 30 °C (EN 60204-1 and
IEC 60364-5-52).

Aluminum cable PVC insulation XLPE insulation

Conductor temperature 70 °C Conductor temperature 90 °C
Size ⌀ [mm] ILmax [A] Time const. [s] ILmax [A] Time const. [s]
3 × 35 + 10 Cu 26 67 736 84 669
3 × 50 + 15 Cu 29 82 959 102 874
3 × 70 + 21 Cu 32 105 1182 131 1079
3 × 95 + 29 Cu 38 128 1492 159 1376
3 × 120 + 41 Cu 41 148 1776 184 1637
3 × 150 + 41 Cu 44 171 2042 213 1881
3 × 185 + 57 Cu 49 196 2422 243 2237
3 × 240 + 72 Cu 54 231 2967 286 2740
3 × 300 + 88 Cu 58 267 3478 330 3229
2 × (3 × 70 + 21 Cu) 2 × 32 210 1182 262 1079
2 × (3 × 95 + 29 Cu) 2 × 38 256 1492 318 1376
2 × (3 × 120 + 41 Cu) 2 × 41 297 1776 368 1637
2 × (3 × 150 + 41 Cu) 2 × 44 343 2042 425 1881
2 × (3 × 185 + 57 Cu) 2 × 49 392 2422 486 2237
2 × (3 × 240 + 72 Cu) 2 × 54 462 2967 572 2740
2 × (3 × 300 + 88 Cu) 2 × 58 533 3478 659 3229
3 × (3 × 150 + 41 Cu) 3 × 44 514 2042 638 1881
3 × (3 × 185 + 57 Cu) 3 × 49 588 2422 728 2237
3 × (3 × 240 + 72 Cu) 3 × 54 693 2967 859 2740
3 × (3 × 300 + 88 Cu) 3 × 58 800 3478 989 3229
4 × (3 × 185 + 57 Cu) 4 × 49 784 2422 971 2237
4 × (3 × 240 + 72 Cu) 4 × 54 924 2967 1145 2740
4 × (3 × 300 + 88 Cu) 4 × 58 1067 3478 1319 3229
5 × (3 × 185 + 57 Cu) 5 × 49 980 2422 1214 2237
5 × (3 × 240 + 72 Cu) 5 × 54 1155 2967 1431 2740
5 × (3 × 300 + 88 Cu) 5 × 58 1333 3478 1648 3229
6 × (3 × 240 + 72 Cu) 6 × 54 1386 2967 1718 2740
6 × (3 × 300 + 88 Cu) 6 × 58 1600 3478 1978 3229
7 × (3 × 240 + 72 Cu) 7 × 54 1617 2967 2004 2740
7 × (3 × 300 + 88 Cu) 7 × 58 1867 3478 2308 3229
8 × (3 × 240 + 72 Cu) 8 × 54 1848 2967 2290 2740
8 × (3 × 300 + 88 Cu) 8 × 58 2133 3478 2637 3229
9 × (3 × 240 + 72 Cu) 9 × 54 2079 2967 2577 2740
9 × (3 × 300 + 88 Cu) 9 × 58 2400 3478 2967 3229
10 × (3 × 240 + 72 Cu) 10 × 54 2310 2967 2867 2740
10 × (3 × 300 + 88 Cu) 10 × 58 2667 3478 3297 3229
236 Technical data

Copper cable PVC insulation XLPE insulation

Conductor temperature 70 °C Conductor temperature 90 °C
Size ⌀ [mm] ILmax [A] Time const. [s] ILmax [A] Time const. [s]
3 × 1.5 + 1.5 13 13 85 16 67
3 × 2.5 + 2.5 14 18 121 23 88
(3 × 4 + 4) 16 24 175 30 133
3×6+6 18 30 251 38 186
3 × 10 + 10 21 42 359 53 268
3 × 16 + 16 23 56 514 70 391
3 × 25 + 16 24 71 791 89 598
3 × 35 + 16 26 88 1000 110 760
3 × 50 + 25 29 107 1308 134 990
3 × 70 + 35 32 137 1613 171 1230
3 × 95 + 50 38 167 2046 209 1551
3 × 120 + 70 41 193 2441 241 1859
3 × 150 + 70 44 223 2820 279 2139
3 × 185 + 95 50 255 3329 319 2525
3 × 240 + 120 55 301 4073 376 3099
3 × 300 + 150 58 348 4779 435 3636
2 × (3 × 70 + 35) 2 × 32 274 1613 342 1230
2 × (3 × 95 + 50) 2 × 38 334 2046 418 1551
2 × (3 × 120 + 70) 2 × 41 386 2441 482 1859
2 × (3 × 150 + 70) 2 × 44 446 2820 558 2139
2 × (3 × 185 + 95) 2 × 50 510 3329 638 2525
2 × (3 × 240 + 120) 2 × 55 602 4073 752 3099
2 × (3 × 300 + 150) 2 × 58 696 4779 869 3636
3 × (3 × 120 + 70) 3 × 41 579 2441 723 1859
3 × (3 × 150 + 70) 3 × 44 669 2820 837 2139
3 × (3 × 185 + 95) 3 × 50 765 3329 957 2525
3 × (3 × 240 + 120) 3 × 55 903 4073 1128 3099
3 × (3 × 300 + 150) 3 × 58 1044 4779 1304 3636
4 × (3 × 150 + 70) 4 × 44 892 2820 1116 2139
4 × (3 × 185 + 95) 4 × 50 1020 3329 1276 2525
4 × (3 × 240 + 120) 4 × 55 1204 4073 1504 3099
4 × (3 × 300 + 150) 4 × 58 1391 4779 1304 3636
5 × (3 × 185 + 95) 5 × 50 1275 3329 1595 2525
5 × (3 × 240 + 120) 5 × 55 1505 4073 1880 3099
5 × (3 × 300 + 150) 5 × 58 1739 4779 2173 3636
6 × (3 × 185 + 95) 6 × 50 1530 3329 1914 2525
6 × (3 × 240 + 120) 6 × 55 1806 4073 2256 3099
6 × (3 × 300 + 150) 6 × 58 2087 4779 2608 3636
7 × (3 × 240 + 120) 7 × 55 2107 4073 2632 3099
7 × (3 × 300 + 150) 7 × 58 2435 4779 3043 3636
8 × (3 × 240 + 120) 8 × 55 2408 4073 3008 3099
8 × (3 × 300 + 150) 8 × 58 2783 4779 3477 3636
 Technical data 237

Tightening torques
Unless a tightening torque is specified in the text, the following torques can be used.

￭ Electrical connections

Size Torque Strength class

M3 0.5 N·m (4.4 lbf·in) 4.6...8.8
M4 1 N·m (9 lbf·in) 4.6...8.8
M5 4 N·m (35 lbf·in) 8.8
M6 9 N·m (6.6 lbf·ft) 8.8
M8 22 N·m (16 lbf·ft) 8.8
M10 42 N·m (31 lbf·ft) 8.8
M12 70 N·m (52 lbf·ft) 8.8
M16 120 N·m (90 lbf·ft) 8.8

￭ Mechanical connections

Size Max. torque Strength class

M5 6 N·m (53 lbf·in) 8.8
M6 10 N·m (7.4 lbf·ft) 8.8
M8 24 N·m (17.7 lbf·ft) 8.8

￭ Insulation supports

Size Max. torque Strength class

M6 5 N·m (44 lbf·in) 8.8
M8 9 N·m (6.6 lbf·ft) 8.8
M10 18 N·m (13.3 lbf·ft) 8.8
M12 31 N·m (23 lbf·ft) 8.8

￭ Cable lugs

Size Max. torque Strength class

M8 15 N·m (11 lbf·ft) 8.8
M10 32 N·m (23.5 lbf·ft) 8.8
M12 50 N·m (37 lbf·ft) 8.8
238 Technical data

Electrical power network specification

Voltage (U1) 400 V units: 380…415 V AC 3-phase ± 10%. This is indicated in the type designation
label as typical input voltage level (3~ 400 V AC).
500 V units: 380…500 V AC 3-phase ± 10%. This is indicated in the type designation
label as typical input voltage levels (3~ 400/480/500 V AC).
690 V units: 525…690 V AC 3-phase ± 10% (525…600 V AC ± 10% in UL/CSA
installations, or corner-grounded TN systems). This is indicated in the type desig-
nation label as typical input voltage levels (3~ 525/600/690 V AC).
Network type TN (grounded) and IT (ungrounded) systems
Frequency 50/60 Hz, variation ± 5% of nominal frequency
Imbalance Max. ± 3% of nominal phase-to-phase input voltage
Short-circuit withstand Rectifier units with the ABB-defined main switch-disconnector and fuses:
strength (IEC/EN 61439-1) Rated peak withstand current (I ): 105 kA
pk
Rated short-time withstand current (Icw): 50 kA/1 s
Rectifier units with ABB-defined main breaker and fuses:
Rated peak withstand current (Ipk): 143 kA
Rated short-time withstand current (Icw): 65 kA/1 s
Short-circuit current protec- The drive is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than
tion (UL 508A, CSA C22.2 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 600 V maximum when the input cable is
No. 14-13) protected with class T fuses.
Fundamental power factor 0.98 (at nominal load)
(cos phi1)
Transformer specification Connection: Dy 11 d0 or Dyn 11 d0
for 12-pulse supply Phase shift between secondaries: 30° electrical
(IEC 60076-1:2011)
Voltage difference between secondaries: < 0.5%
Short-circuit impedance of secondaries: > 5%
Short-circuit impedance difference between secondaries: ≤ 10% of the percentage
impedance
To avoid a potentially destructive DC voltage level in an earth fault situation,
grounding of the secondaries is not allowed. Static shielding is recommended.

DC connection data
Voltage (U2), 6-pulse mod- ACS880-304-xxxxA-3+A018: 513…560 V DC. This is indicated in the type desig-
ules nation label as typical output voltage level 540 V DC.
ACS880-304-xxxxA-5+A018: 513…675 V DC. This is indicated in the type desig-
nation label as typical output voltage levels 540/648/675 V DC.
ACS880-304-xxxxA-7+A018: 709…932 V DC (709…810 V DC for UL/CSA). This
is indicated in the type designation label as typical output voltage levels
709/810/932 V DC (810 V DC for UL/CSA).
Voltage (U2), 12-pulse ACS880-304-xxxxA-3+A018: 532 … 581 V DC. This is indicated in the type desig-
modules nation label as typical output voltage level 560 V DC.
ACS880-304-xxxxA-5+A018: 532 … 700 V DC. This is indicated in the type desig-
nation label as typical output voltage levels 560/672/700 V DC.
ACS880-304-xxxxA-7+A018: 735 … 966 V DC (735 … 840 V DC for UL/CSA).
This is indicated in the type designation label as typical output voltage levels
735/840/966 V DC (840 V DC for UL/CSA).
 Technical data 239

Efficiency
> 98%
Note: The efficiency is not calculated according to the ecodesign standard IEC 61800-9-2.

Energy efficiency data (ecodesign)

Energy efficiency data is not provided for the drive/unit. Multidrives and multidrive modules
are not in the scope of the EU ecodesign requirements (Regulation EU/2019/1781) or the
UK ecodesign requirements (Regulation SI 2021 No. 745).

Control unit connection data

See chapter The control unit (page 243).

Optical components
The specifications of the optic cable are as follows:
• Storage temperature: -55 … +85 °C (-67 … +185 °F)
• Installation temperature: -20 … +70 °C (-4 … +158 °F)
• Maximum short-term tensile force: 50 N (11.2 lbf)
• Minimum short-term bend radius: 25 mm (1.0 in)
• Minimum long-term bend radius: 35 mm (1.4 in)
• Maximum long-term tensile load: 1 N (3.6 ozf)
• Flexing: Max. 1000 cycles
ABB drive products in general utilize 5 and 10 MBd (megabaud) optical components from
Avago Technologies’ Versatile Link range. Note that the optical component type is not
directly related to the actual communication speed.
Note: The optical components (transmitter and receiver) on a fiber optic link must be of the
same type.
Plastic optical fiber (POF) cables can be used with both 5 MBd and 10 MBd optical
components. 10 MBd components also enable the use of Hard Clad Silica (HCS®) cables,
which allow longer connection distances thanks to their lower attenuation. HCS® cables
cannot be used with 5 MBd optical components.
The maximum lengths of fiber optic links for POF and HCS® cables are 20 and 200 meters
(65.6 ft and 656 ft) respectively.

Protection classes for module

Degrees of protection IP00
(IEC/EN 60529)
Enclosure types (UL UL Type Open
50/50E)
Overvoltage category III
(IEC/EN 60664-1)
Protective class I
(IEC/EN 61800-5-1)
240 Technical data

Ambient conditions
The unit is to be used in a heated indoor controlled environment.

Operation Storage Transportation

installed for stationary use in protective package in protective package
Altitude above sea level 0…2000 m (0…6561.7 ft) - -
no derating.
For altitudes over 2000 m
(6561.7 ft), contact ABB.
Air temperature 0…+45 °C (+32…+113 °F), -40…+70 °C -40…+70 °C
no condensation allowed. (-40…+158 °F) (-40…+158 °F)
Output derated in the
range +40…+50 °C
(+113…+131 °F).
Relative humidity Maximum 95%, no con- Maximum 95%, no con- Maximum 95%, no con-
densation allowed densation allowed densation allowed
Contamination IEC/EN 60721-3-3:2002: IEC 60721-3-1 IEC 60721-3-2
Classification of environ-
mental conditions - Part 3-
3: Classification of groups
of environmental paramet-
ers and their severities -
Stationary use of weather
protected locations
Chemical gases Class 3C2 Class 1C2 Class 2C2
Solid particles Class 3S1 Class 1S3 (packing must Class 2S2
support this, otherwise
1S2)
No conductive dust al-
lowed.
Vibration IEC/EN 60721-3-3:2002 IEC/EN 60721-3-1:1997 IEC/EN 60721-3-2:1997
IEC 61800-5-1 10…57 Hz, max. 0.075 mm 10...57 Hz: max. 0.075 mm 2...9 Hz: max. 3.5 mm
IEC 60068-2-6:2007, amplitude 57…150 Hz 1 g amplitude 57...150 Hz: 1g amplitude
EN 60068-2-6:2008 Envir- Tested in a typical cabinet 9...200 Hz: 10 m/s2
onmental testing Part 2: assembly according to: (32.8 ft/s2)
Tests -Test Fc: Vibration Max. 1 mm (0.04 in.) (peak
(sinusoidal) value, 5 … 13.2 Hz), max.
0.7 g (13.2 … 100 Hz) si-
nusoidal
Shock Not allowed With packing max. With packing max.
IEC 60068-2-27:2008, 100 m/s2 (330 ft./s2) 11 ms 100 m/s2 (330 ft./s2) 11 ms
EN 60068-2-27:2009
Environmental testing -
Part 2-27: Tests - Test Ea
and guidance: Shock

Cooling
Method Forced air cooling
 Technical data 241

Materials
￭ Module housing
Front plate covered with Lexan 8B35 polycarbonate film, color PMS 1C Cool Gray / RAL
9002 and PMS Process Black

￭ Fire safety of materials (IEC 60332-1)

Insulating materials and non-metallic items: mostly self-extinctive.

￭ Package
Plywood base, corrugated cardboard, PET straps. Product wrapping: polyethylene sheet
or VCI protection bag.

￭ Disposal
The main parts of the drive can be recycled to preserve natural resources and energy.
Product parts and materials should be dismantled and separated.
Generally all metals, such as steel, aluminum, copper and its alloys, and precious metals
can be recycled as material. Plastics, rubber, cardboard and other packaging material can
be used in energy recovery. Printed circuit boards and large electrolytic capacitors need
selective treatment according to IEC 62635 guidelines. To aid recycling, plastic parts are
marked with an appropriate identification code.
Contact your local ABB distributor for further information on environmental aspects and
recycling instructions for professional recyclers. End of life treatment must follow international
and local regulations. See ACS880 cabinet-installed drives and multidrive modules recycling
instructions and environmental information (3AXD50000153909 [English]).

Standards
See ACS880 multidrive cabinets and modules electrical planning instructions
(3AUA0000102324 [English]).

Markings
See ACS880 multidrive cabinets and modules electrical planning instructions
(3AUA0000102324 [English]).

Disclaimers
￭ Generic disclaimer
The manufacturer shall have no obligation with respect to any product which (i) has been
improperly repaired or altered; (ii) has been subjected to misuse, negligence or accident;
(iii) has been used in a manner contrary to the manufacturer’s instructions; or (iv) has failed
as a result of ordinary wear and tear.

￭ Cybersecurity disclaimer
This product can be connected to and to communicate information and data via a network
interface. The HTTP protocol, which is used between the commissioning tool (Drive
Composer) and the product, is an unsecured protocol. For independent and continuous
operation of product such connection via network to commissioning tool is not necessary.
242 Technical data

However it is Customer's sole responsibility to provide and continuously ensure a secure

connection between the product and Customer network or any other network (as the case
may be). Customer shall establish and maintain any appropriate measures (such as but not
limited to the installation of firewalls, prevention of physical access, application of
authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of anti-virus programs, etc) to
protect the product, the network, its system and the interface against any kind of security
breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or
information.
Notwithstanding any other provision to the contrary and regardless whether the contract is
terminated or not, ABB and its affiliates are under no circumstances liable for damages
and/or losses related to such security breaches, any unauthorized access, interference,
intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or information.
 The control unit 243

11
The control unit

Contents of this chapter

This chapter
• describes the connections of the control unit
• contains the specifications of the inputs and outputs of the control unit.

General
The supply unit is controlled by a BCU-x2 control unit. The BCU-x2 consists of a BCON-12
control board (and a BIOC-01 I/O connector board and power supply board) built in a metal
housing. The control unit is connected to the supply module(s) by fiber optic cables.
In this manual, the name “BCU-x2” represents the control unit types BCU-02 and BCU-12.
These have a different number of power module connections (2 and 7 respectively) but are
otherwise similar.
244 The control unit

BCU-x2 layout
„
Description
I/O I/O terminals (see following diagram)

SLOT 1 I/O extension, encoder interface or fieldbus

adapter module connection. (This is the
sole location for an FDPI-02 diagnostics
and panel interface.)
SLOT 2 I/O extension, encoder interface or fieldbus
adapter module connection
SLOT 3 I/O extension, encoder interface, fieldbus
adapter or FSO-xx safety functions module
connection
SLOT 4 RDCO-0x DDCS communication option
module connection

X205 Memory unit connection

BATTERY Holder for real-time clock battery (BR2032)

AI1 Mode selector for analog input AI1 (I =

current, U = voltage)
AI2 Mode selector for analog input AI2 (I =
current, U = voltage)
D2D TERM Termination switch for drive-to-drive link
(D2D)
DICOM= Ground selection. Determines whether
DIOGND DICOM is separated from DIOGND (ie. the
common reference for the digital inputs
floats). See the ground isolation diagram.

7-segment display
Multicharacter indications are displayed as repeated se-
quences of characters
(“U” is indicated briefly before “o”.)
Control program running

Control program startup in progress

(Flashing) Firmware cannot be started.

Memory unit missing or corrupted

Firmware download from PC to control unit

in progress

At power-up, the display may show short

indications of eg. “1”, “2”, “b” or “U”. These
are normal indications immediately after
power-up. If the display ends up showing
any other value than those described, it in-
dicates a hardware failure.
 The control unit 245

Description
XAI Analog inputs
XAO Analog outputs
XDI Digital inputs, Digital input interlock (DIIL)
XRO3
XD24 XPOW XDIO Digital input/outputs
XD2D Drive-to-drive link
XRO2 XD24 +24 V output (for digital inputs)
XDIO XAO
XETH Ethernet port – Not in use

XRO1 XPOW External power input

XRO1 Relay output RO1
XDI XAI XRO2 Relay output RO2
X485
XRO3 Relay output RO3
XSTO Safe torque off connection (input signals)

XSTO
XSTO OUT Safe torque off connection (to inverter mod-
XD2D XSTO
OUT ules)
X12 (On the opposite side) Connection for FSO-
xx safety functions module (optional)
X13 Control panel / PC connection
X485 Not in use

V1T/V1R, Fiber optic connection to modules 1 and 2

V2T/V2R (VxT = transmitter, VxR = receiver)
V3T/V3R Fiber optic connection to modules 3…7 (BCU-
… 12/22 only)
V7T/V7R (VxT = transmitter, VxR = receiver)
V8T/V8R Fiber optic connection to modules 8…12
… (BCU-22 only)
V12T/V12R (VxT = transmitter, VxR = receiver)

SD CARD Data logger memory card for inverter module

communication

BATT OK Real-time clock battery voltage is higher than

2.8 V. If the LED is off when the control unit
is powered, replace the battery.
FAULT The control program has generated a fault.
See the firmware manual of the supply/invert-
er unit.
PWR OK Internal voltage supply is OK
WRITE Writing to memory card in progress. Do not
remove the memory card.
246 The control unit

Default I/O diagram of the supply control unit

The diagram below shows the default I/O connections on the supply control unit (A51), and
describes the use of the connections in the supply unit.
The wire size accepted by all screw terminals (for both stranded and solid wire) is 0.5 …
2.5 mm2 (24…12 AWG). The torque is 0.5 N·m (5 lbf·in).

Terminal Description
XD2D Drive-to-drive link

1 1 B
2 2 A
Not in use by default
3 3 BGND
4
4 Shield

Drive-to-drive link termination switch 1)

OFF
ON

D2D.TERM
X485 RS485 connection

5 5 B
6 6 A
Not in use by default
7 7 BGND
8
8 Shield
XRO1, XRO2, XRO3 Relay outputs
11 NC Norm. closed
11
12 COM Common XRO1: Running 2) (Energized = running)
12 250 V AC / 30 V DC, 2 A
13 NO Norm. open
13
21 21 NC Norm. closed
2)
XRO2: Fault (-1) (Energized = no fault)
22 22 COM Common
250 V AC / 30 V DC, 2 A
23 23 NO Norm. open
31
31 NC Norm. closed
32 XRO3: MCB ctrl 3) (Energized = closes
32 COM Common main contactor/breaker) 250 V AC /
33
30 V DC, 2 A
33 NO Norm. open
XSTO, XSTO OUT Safe torque off 4)
1 OUT
1
2 SGND XSTO: Factory connection. Both circuits must be closed for the drive to start
2
3 IN1 (IN1 and IN2 must be connected to OUT).
3
4 4 IN2
5 5 IN1
6 6 SGND
7 XSTO OUT: Not in use.
7 IN2
8
8 SGND
XDI Digital inputs
 The control unit 247

Terminal Description
2)
1 DI1 Temp fault (0 = overtemperature)
1 2)
2 DI2 Run enable (1 = run enable)
2
3)
3 3 DI3 MCB feedback (0 = main contactor/breaker open)
4 2)
4 DI4 Auxiliary circuit breaker fault
5
5 DI5 Not in use by default. Can be used for eg. earth fault monitoring.
6
2)
7 6 DI6 Reset (0 -> 1 = fault reset)
7 DIIL Not in use by default. Can be used for eg. emergency stop.
XDIO Digital input/outputs
1 DIO1 Not in use by default
1
2 2 DIO2 Not in use by default
3 3 DIOGND Digital input/output ground
4 4 DIOGND Digital input/output ground
XD24 Auxiliary voltage output
1 +24VD +24 V DC 200 mA 5)
5
6 2 DICOM Digital input ground
7 3 +24VD +24 V DC 200 mA
5)

8
4 DIOGND Digital input/output ground

Ground selection switch 6)

OFF
ON

DICOM=DIOGND
XAI Analog inputs, reference voltage output
1 +VREF 10 V DC, RL 1…10 kohm
1
2 -VREF -10 V DC, RL 1…10 kohm
2
3 3 AGND Ground
4 4 AI1+
Not in use by default. 0(2)…10 V, Rin > 200 kohm 7)
5 5 AI1-
6
6 AI2+
7 Not in use by default. 0(4)…20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm 8)
7 AI2-
AI1 AI1 current/voltage selection switch
U
I

AI2 AI2 current/voltage selection switch

U
I

XAO Analog outputs

1 AO1
1 2)
Zero (no signal indicated) 0…20 mA, RL < 500 ohm
2 2 AGND
3 3 AO2 2)
4 Zero (not signal indicated) 0…20 mA, RL < 500 ohm
4 AGND
XPOW External power input
1 +24VI
1
2 2 GND
24 V DC, 2.05 A
3 3 +24VI
4 4 GND
X12 Not in use in supply units
X13 Control panel connection
248 The control unit

Terminal Description
X205 Memory unit connection

1) Must be set to ON when the supply unit is the first or last unit on the drive-to-drive (D2D) link. On intermediate units, set
termination to OFF.
2) Default use of the signal in the control program. The use can be changed by a parameter. See also the delivery-specific
circuit diagrams.
3) Use of the signal in the control program (fixed). See also the delivery-specific circuit diagrams.
4) This input only acts as a true Safe torque off input in inverter units. In other applications (such as a supply or brake unit),
de-energizing the IN1 and/or IN2 terminal will stop the unit but not constitute a true safety function.
5) Total load capacity of these outputs is 4.8 W (200 mA at 24 V) minus the power taken by DIO1 and DIO2.
6) Determines whether DICOM is separated from DIOGND (ie, common reference for digital inputs floats). ON: DICOM
connected to DIOGND. OFF: DICOM and DIOGND separate.
7) Current [0(4)…20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm] or voltage [0(2)…10 V, Rin > 200 kohm] input selected by switch AI1. Change of
setting requires reboot of control unit.
8) Current [0(4)…20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm] or voltage [0(2)…10 V, Rin > 200 kohm] input selected by switch AI2. Change of
setting requires reboot of control unit.

External power supply for the control unit (XPOW)

The control unit is powered from a 24 V DC, 2 A supply through terminal block XPOW. With
a type BCU control unit, a second supply can be connected to the same terminal block for
redundancy.
Using an external supply is recommended if
• the control unit needs to be kept operational during input power breaks, for example,
because of continuous fieldbus communication
• immediate restart is needed after a power break (that is, no control unit power-up delay
is allowed).

Safe torque off (XSTO, XSTO OUT)

Note: The XSTO input only acts as a true Safe torque off input on the inverter control unit.
De-energizing the IN1 and/or IN2 terminals of other units (supply, DC/DC converter, or brake
unit) will stop the unit but not constitute a true safety function.

FSO-xx safety functions module connection (X12)

See the user manual of the FSO-xx module. Note that the FSO-xx safety functions module
is not in use in supply, DC/DC converter or brake units.

SDHC memory card slot

The BCU-x2 has an on-board data logger that collects real-time data from the power modules
to help fault tracing and analysis. The data is stored onto the SDHC memory card inserted
into the SD CARD slot and can be analyzed by ABB service personnel.
 The control unit 249

Connector data
Power supply (XPOW) Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.45 N·m (4 lbf·in)
24 V (±10%) DC, 2 A
External power input.
Two supplies can be connected to the BCU-x2 for redundancy.
Relay outputs RO1…RO3 Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm2
(XRO1…XRO3) Tightening torque 0.45 N·m (4 lbf·in)
250 V AC / 30 V DC, 2 A
Protected by varistors
+24 V output (XD24:2 and XD24:4) Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.45 N·m (4 lbf·in)
Total load capacity of these outputs is 4.8 W (200 mA / 24 V) minus
the power taken by DIO1 and DIO2.
Digital inputs DI1…DI6 (XDI:1…XDI:6) Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.45 N·m (4 lbf·in)
24 V logic levels: “0” < 5 V, “1” > 15 V
Rin: 2.0 kohm
Input type: NPN/PNP (DI1…DI5), PNP (DI6)
Hardware filtering: 0.04 ms, digital filtering up to 8 ms
DI6 (XDI:6) can alternatively be used as an input for a PTC sensor.
"0" > 4 kohm, "1" < 1.5 kohm.
Imax: 15 mA (DI1…DI5), 5 mA (DI6)
Start interlock input DIIL (XDI:7) Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.45 N·m (4 lbf·in)
24 V logic levels: "0" < 5 V, "1" > 15 V
Rin: 2.0 kohm
Input type: NPN/PNP
Hardware filtering: 0.04 ms, digital filtering up to 8 ms
Digital inputs/outputs DIO1 and DIO2 Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm2
(XDIO:1 and XDIO:2) Tightening torque 0.45 N·m (4 lbf·in)
Input/output mode selection by paramet- As inputs: 24 V logic levels: "0" < 5 V, "1" > 15 V. R : 2.0 kohm. Fil-
in
ers. tering: 1 ms.
DIO1 can be configured as a frequency As outputs: Total output current from +24VD is limited to 200 mA
input (0…16 kHz with hardware filtering
of 4 microseconds) for 24 V level square +24VD
wave signal (sinusoidal or other wave
form cannot be used). DIO2 can be con-
figured as a 24 V level square wave fre-
quency output. See the firmware manual, DIOx
parameter group 111/11.
RL

DIOGND

Reference voltage for analog inputs Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm2
+VREF and -VREF (XAI:1 and XAI:2) Tightening torque 0.45 N·m (4 lbf·in)
10 V ±1% and –10 V ±1%, Rload 1…10 kohm
Maximum output current: 10 mA
250 The control unit

Analog inputs AI1 and AI2 Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm2
(XAI:4 … XAI:7). Tightening torque 0.45 N·m (4 lbf·in)
Current/voltage input mode selection by Current input: –20…20 mA, R = 100 ohm
in
switches
Voltage input: –10…10 V, Rin > 200 kohm
Differential inputs, common mode range ±30 V
Sampling interval per channel: 0.25 ms
Hardware filtering: 0.25 ms, adjustable digital filtering up to 8 ms
Resolution: 11 bit + sign bit
Inaccuracy: 1% of full scale range
Analog outputs AO1 and AO2 (XAO) Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.45 N·m (4 lbf·in)
0…20 mA, Rload < 500 ohm
Frequency range: 0…500 Hz
Resolution: 11 bit + sign bit
Inaccuracy: 2% of full scale range
XD2D connector Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.45 N·m (4 lbf·in)
Physical layer: RS-485
Transmission rate: 8 Mbit/s
Cable type: Shielded twisted-pair cable with a twisted pair for data
and a wire or another pair for signal ground (nominal impedance
100 … 165 ohm, for example Belden 9842)
Maximum length of link: 50 m (164 ft)
Termination by switch
RS-485 connection (X485) Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.45 N·m (4 lbf·in)
Physical layer: RS-485
Cable type: Shielded twisted-pair cable with a twisted pair for data
and a wire or another pair for signal ground (nominal impedance
100 … 165 ohm, for example Belden 9842)
Maximum length of link: 50 m (164 ft)
Safe torque off connection (XSTO) Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.45 N·m (4 lbf·in)
Input voltage range: -3…30 V DC
Logic levels: "0" < 5 V, "1" > 17 V.
Note: For the unit to start, both connections must be “1”. This applies
to all control units (including drive, inverter, supply, brake, DC/DC
converter etc. control units), but true Safe torque off functionality is
only achieved through the XSTO connector of the drive/inverter
control unit.
EMC (immunity) according to IEC 61326-3-1
Safe torque off output (XSTO OUT) Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.45 N·m (4 lbf·in)
To STO connector of inverter module.
Control panel connection (X13) Connector: RJ-45
Cable length < 3 m
Ethernet connection (XETH) Connector: RJ-45
This connection is not supported by the firmware.
SDHC memory card slot (SD CARD) Memory card type: SDHC
Maximum memory size: 4 GB
 The control unit 251

The terminals of the control unit fulfill the Protective Extra Low Voltage (PELV) requirements. The PELV re-
quirements of a relay output are not fulfilled if a voltage higher than 48 V is connected to the relay output.
252 The control unit

￭ BCU-x2 ground isolation diagram

XPOW
+24VI 1
GND 2
+24VI 3
GND 4
XAI
+VREF 1
-VREF 2
AGND 3
AI1+ 4
AI1- 5 **
AI2+ 6
AI2- 7
XAO
AO1 1
AGND 2
AO2 3
AGND 4
XD2D
B 1
A 2
BGND 3
SHIELD 4
XRO1, XRO2, XRO3
NC 11
COM 12
NO 13
NC 21
COM 22
NO 23
NC 31
COM 32
NO 33
XD24
+24VD 5
DICOM 6
+24VD 7
DIOGND 8
XDIO
DIO1 1
DIO2 2
DIOGND 3
DIOGND 4
XDI
DI1 1 *
DI2 2
DI3 3
DI4 4
DI5 5
DI6 6
DIIL 7
XSTO
OUT 1
SGND 2
IN1 3
IN2 4
XSTO OUT
IN1 5
SGND 6
IN2 7
SGND 8

*Ground selector (DICOM=DIOGND) settings

DICOM=DIOGND: ON
All digital inputs share a common ground (DICOM connected to DIOGND). This is the default setting.
DICOM=DIOGND: OFF
Ground of digital inputs DI1…DI5 and DIIL (DICOM) is isolated from DIO signal ground (DIOGND). Isolation
voltage 50 V.

**The maximum common mode voltage between each AI input and AGND is +30 V
 Dimension drawings 253

12
Dimension drawings

Contents of this chapter

This chapter shows dimensions of the ACS880-304…+A018 diode supply modules and
related accessories.
254 Dimension drawings

Dimensions of D7T supply module

 Dimension drawings 255

Dimensions of D8T supply module

256 Dimension drawings

Dimensions of quick connector for D8T module

Dimensions in mm
(1 mm = 0.0394 in)
 Dimension drawings 257

Dimensions of the pull-out ramp for D8T module

258 Dimension drawings

Dimensions of BCU control unit

ACX-AP-x_dimensions control panel with door mount kit.pdf Dimension drawings 259

Dimension drawings 155

Dimensions of ACS-AP-x control panel with DPMP-01 door
ACX-AP-x
mountingcontrol
kit panel with door mounting kit

39.5 [1.56]
11 [0.43]
81.0 [3.19]
86.5 [3.41]
24.8 [0.97]
101.5 [4.00]
239.5 [9.43]

261.8 [10.31]
259.2 [10.20]

123.1 [4.85]
125.0 [4.92]

• Cutting in the cabinet door: 109 mm × 223 mm (4.29 in. × 8.78 in.)
• Plate thickness: 1.5…2.5 mm (0.059…0.098 in.)
260 Dimension drawings

Dimensions of main switch-disconnectors

￭ Dimensions of OT1250E12

146

324.0
306.0

www.abb.com Dimensions in mm
(1 mm = 0.0394 in)
 Dimension drawings 261

￭ Dimensions of OT1250E12DD (IEC)

www.abb.com Dimensions in mm
(1 mm = 0.0394 in)
262 Dimension drawings

￭ Dimensions of OT2000E12 (IEC)

145.9

472.5
376.4

www.abb.com Dimensions in mm
(1 mm = 0.0394 in)
 Dimension drawings 263

￭ Dimensions of OT1200U12 (UL)

mm
in 107 OT1000-1250E_ OT1600E_
122 82 4.21 OT1000-1250X_ OT1600X_
4.80 3.23 OT800U_
232 50 13.5
0.53
OT1200U_
M8 9.13 1.97
5/16 *) 83
3.27
116 A1
122
4.57 4.80

306 372
206 223.2 14.65
8.11 8.79 12.05

B1
135
*) 5.31 11
0.43 40
1.57 6
176 22.5 0.24
189 B
7.44
6.93 0.89
50 20
1.97 0.79
A C1

A 334.5
B 80
A1 294
B1 324
C1 350

www.abb.com Dimensions in mm
(1 mm = 0.0394 in)

￭ Dimensions of switch-disconnector auxiliary contacts

OA1G10, 0A3G01

2×0.75…2.5 mm2 (2×18…14 AWG)

0.8 N·m (7 lbf·in)

Pozidriv M3.5 Form 2

264 Dimension drawings

￭ Dimensions of switch-disconnector handle

Ø31 Ø5
80 71
54

ø 69,4
L 45°
53
53

Handle type Length L [mm]

OHB150J12P 300
OHB200J12P 400

Dimensions in mm
(1 mm = 0.0394 in)
 Dimension drawings 265

Dimensions of AC fuses
￭ Dimensions of 170M6411, 170M6412, 170M6413, 170M6414, 170M6415,
170M6416, 170M6417, 170M6419

D
E A

F
E H

Size A B D E F G H
3 51 53 92 76 M12 10 ø30

3 1) 51 65 92 76 M12 10 ø30

1) For size 3 1600...2000 A

Dimensions in mm
(1 mm = 0.0394 in)
266 Dimension drawings

￭ Dimensions of 170M7062, 170M7063, 170M7064

Indicator

Size F G
4B M10 33

Dimensions in mm
(1 mm = 0.0394 in)
www.cooperindustries.com
 Dimension drawings 267

Dimensions of main contactors

￭ Dimensions of AF1250-30-22-70

50
27 72 O7 242

344 313 263 249

O13 72 72 48.5 8
210

72 2.83"
249 9.8"

M6 1/4-20 UNC

AF1250 www.abb.com
268 Dimension drawings

Dimensions in mm
(1 mm = 0.0394 in)

￭ Dimensions of AF2050-30-22-70

ø 13 40
0.51"
40 1.57"
17 0.67"
13 17
30 1.18"
0.51" 40
10 0.39"

AF2050
244
136 136 3

392 312 340

80 136 9 47 10
104 244
438

www.abb.com Dimensions in mm
(1 mm = 0.0394 in)
 Dimension drawings 269

￭ Dimensions of AF1650-30-22-70

136 136 3

392 312 340

80 136 9 47 10
104 244
438

www.abb.com Dimensions in mm
(1 mm = 0.0394 in)
270 Dimension drawings

Dimensions of main circuit breakers

￭ E2.2S-A (UL/CSA/IEC)
„
)&%2%7%,%:%%%
VR
 -:

 ---


  

 =

  


   
 =



 

<   
< < <


=

2 0 0 0
 


= 

 
 



HR
 -:
 

 
 ---

  

 =

 ---   -:
 ---  -: 
 

=
  

    

<   

< < <
  


  
  =
2 0 0 0
=


 


 

 






 
 




  

  



  
 

!  ! !  !
 

1 Horizontal terminals 1600…2000 A 7 Moving part

2 Vertical terminals 1600…2000 A 8 Fixed part
3 Tightening torque 8.6 N·m (76 lbf·in) 9 Segregation
4 Door position 10 Connected, test, disconnected distances
5 Grounding 11 Roof insulation or insulated material
6 Mounting fixed part screws
 Dimension drawings 271

￭ E4.2S (IEC)

+595
)27,% )27,%
):%
 -:   

 --- 


  
=
 



  

< <  < <  < <  < <  < <



¼     

=

 

   
 


 

)27,%

 ---   -:

 
  
  
 
 =  


=

 2 0 0 0

¼ 

!  ! !  !    

=


=

2 0 0 0

)27,%
):%
 ---   -:
  

    

 =

    
=

 2 0 0 0

¼ 


!  ! !  !   
=


=
2 0 0 0

1 Horizontal terminals 3200 A 7 Door position

2 Vertical terminals 3200 A 8 Earthing device
3 Horizontal terminals 4000 A 9 Mobile part
4 Vertical terminals 4000 A 10 Fixed part
5 Tightening torque 3200 A 20 N·m 11 Segregation (where envisaged)
6 Tightening torque 4000 A 20 N·m 12 Distance from connected for testing to isolated
272 Dimension drawings

￭ E4.2S-A (UL/CSA/IEC)
„
)7%,%:%%%

VR
  - :
    
  - - -
    

    
 =   

=

      
        

  
   
  

      
< < < <

=
  
    
2 0 0 0
  

= 
   
   
      

HR
  
  - :     
   
  - - -
   


   
 =   

   - - -    - :
     - - -      -: 
  
  
     
         
    =
   < <   
< <
 

     

    
  
   =
  
2 0 0 0
= 
    

       

  
 

  
 
  

      
     
  
    
       

 
 
  
  

!  !   
     
!  !
  

1 Horizontal terminals 2500 A 7 Moving part

2 Vertical terminals 2500 A 8 Fixed part
3 Tightening torque 20 N·m (177 lbf·in) 9 Segregation
4 Door position 10 Connected, test, disconnected distances
5 Grounding 11 Roof insulation or insulated material
6 Mounting fixed part screws
 Dimension drawings 273

￭ E6.2V (IEC)
„
+5
),:%
),:%
)<%
 -:
 -:
 ---   

   --- 
=

 

 
< < < <  < < 

¼ 

 


= 

   

  

),:%

   
= 


 


--- =
0 0 0



 
¼    
=
!  ! !  !  

-: =
2 0 0 0

),:%
)<%

  
 
=


  


--- =
0 0 0



 
  
¼   =
!  ! !  !  

-: =
2 0 0 0

1 Horizontal terminals 4000…5000 A 6 Earthing device

2 Vertical terminals 6300 A 7 Mobile part
3 Tightening torque 4000…5000 A 20 N·m 8 Fixed part
4 Tightening torque 6300 A 20 Nm 9 Segregation (where envisaged)
5 Door position
274 Dimension drawings

￭ E6.2V-A (UL/CSA/IEC)

),%:%0%%%

 -:
    95 +5
    -:
   
  - - -      
              
    ---
  
 
=     



 
   
   < < < <    < <   
  
   
  
         
        

=
    
     
 
      

     
           
   
       
  
       

      
     

   
  
  
  
  


 
  
  

  
!  !   
   !  !
  

95DGMXVWPHQW
  
  
   
  
         
                  
 =

 =       

 

2 0 2 0 0 0
0 0 =
=

+5DGMXVWPHQW
  
  
  
         

               
         
=    
   =



=
2 0 =
0 0
2 0 0 0

1 Horizontal terminals 5000 A 5 Mounting fixed part screws M8x25 provided.

Tightening torque 20 N·m (177 lbf·in).
2 Vertical terminals 5000 A 6 Moving part
3 Tightening torque 20 N·m (177 lbf·in) 7 Fixed part
4 Door position 8 Segregation
 Dimension drawings 275

Miscellaneous components
„￭ IP54 roof fan (IEC/UL) in 600 mm enclosure

218

Dimensions in mm
(1 mm = 0.0394 in)
 276 Dimension drawings

„ ￭ RFI filter and related accessories

RFI filter

Dimensions in mm
(1 mm = 0.0394 in)
 Dimension drawings 277

„
Oval toroid kit
278 Dimension drawings

„
Oval toroid
 Example circuit diagrams 279

13. Example circuit diagrams

Contents of this chapter
This chapter contains three example circuit diagram sets. Each set includes one supply module type and typical related equipment. These supply module types are presented:
• ACS880-304-1820A-3+A018+C183+C188 (2×D8T 6-pulse connection)
• ACS880-304-4560A-3+A018+C183 (5×D8T 6-pulse connection)
• ACS880-304-0910A-3+A004+A018+C188 (2×D7T 12-pulse connection)
Note: These diagrams do not necessarily match the installation-specific circuit diagrams of a tailor-made cabinet-installed unit.
The purpose of these diagrams is to help in:
• understanding the internal connections and operation of the cabinet-installed drive with a diode supply unit, and
• learning how to wire a (ACS880-304…+A018) diode supply module when installed in a user-defined cabinet.
Component designations used in the diagrams
￭ 2×D8T 6-pulse circuit diagrams
The 2×D8T 6-pulse circuit diagrams include:

Designation Component
A1.1 CVAR board for UL/CSA installations only
A51 BCU control unit
A58 DPMP-01 door mounting kit for control panel
A59 ACS-AP-x control panel
A61 Emergency stop safety relay
A62 Emergency stop extension safety relay
F1.x Main AC fuses for protecting the input cables, main contactor
F3.x AC fuses for protecting the modules
G24 Incoming cubicle fan for cooling the AC fuses
Q1.1 Main switch-disconnector
Q2.1 Main contactor (not obligatory). See Switching, disconnecting and protecting solution (page 41).
Q21 Auxiliary voltage switch with fuses
S21 Operating switch
S61 Emergency stop button
S62 Emergency stop reset button
T1.x Frame D8T diode supply module(s)
T111 400 V AC 3-phase DOL fan supply (option +C188)
T21 Auxiliary voltage transformer

The 2×D8T 6-pulse circuit diagrams also include:

• an example of auxiliary voltage distribution
• internal heating element of the module (option +C183)
• DSU cabinet option +Q963 Emergency stop (category 0) with safety relays, by activating the Safe torque off function without opening the main contactor/main breaker.
280 Example circuit diagrams
￭ 5×D8T 6-pulse circuit diagrams
The 5×D8T 6-pulse circuit diagrams include:

Designation Component
A1.1 CVAR board for UL/CSA installations only
A51 BCU control unit
A58 DPMP-01 door mounting kit for control panel
A59 ACS-AP-x control panel
F3.x AC fuses for protecting the modules
G24 Incoming cubicle fan for cooling the AC fuses
Q1.1 Main breaker (air circuit breaker)
Q21 Auxiliary voltage switch with fuses
S21 Operating switch
T1.x Frame D8T diode supply module(s)
T21 Auxiliary voltage transformer

The 5×D8T 6-pulse circuit diagrams also include:

• an example of auxiliary voltage distribution
• internal heating element of the module (option +C183).

￭ 2×D7T 12-pulse circuit diagrams

The 2×D7T 12-pulse circuit diagrams include:

Designation Component
A1.1 CVAR board for UL/CSA installations only
A51 BCU control unit
A58 DPMP-01 door mounting kit for control panel
A59 ACS-AP-x control panel
F1.x Main AC fuses for protecting the input cables, main contactors and modules
G24.1 Incoming cubicle fan for cooling the AC fuses
Q1.1 Main switch-disconnector
Q2.1 Main contactor (not obligatory). See Switching, disconnecting and protecting solution (page 41).
Q21 Auxiliary voltage switch with fuses
S21 Operating switch
T1.x Frame D7T diode supply module(s)
T21 Auxiliary voltage transformer

The 2×D7T 12-pulse circuit diagrams also include:

• an example of auxiliary voltage distribution
• 230 V AC 1-phase DOL fan supply (option +C188).

￭ Differences of 2×D8T 6-pulse, 5×D8T 6-pulse and 2×D7T 12-pulse circuit diagrams
The main difference between 2×D8T 6-pulse, 2×D7T 12-pulse and 5×D8T 6-pulse diagrams is that in 5×D8T, the main AC fuses [F1.x], main switch-disconnector [Q1.1] and main contactor [Q2.1]
are replaced with one component, main circuit breaker [Q1.1]. 2×D7T 12-pulse has the main AC fuses [F1.x] for protecting modules, therefore there are no AC fuses [F3.x] in module cabinet.
The 2×D8T 6-pulse modules have optional 400 V AC 3-phase DOL fans while the D7T modules have optional 230 V AC 1-phase DOL fans. The diagrams of 5×D8T 6-pulse describe modules with
standard speed-controlled fans.
D8T 6-pulse modules can have the internal heating element in the module (option +C183) while D7T 12-pulse modules do not have it.
 Example circuit diagrams 281
Circuit diagram set contents
The contents of each circuit diagram set are listed below:
ACS880-304+A018, 2xD8T 6-pulse (3AXD10000285426)
• Main switch disconnector, AC fuses
• Main contactor
• Module heaters (+183)
• Module DOL fan supply (+C188)
• Internal auxiliary voltage distribution
• Incoming unit fan
• BCU-02 Control unit
• Emergency stop, Category 0 without opening main contactor with safety relay (+Q963)
ACS880-304+A018, 5xD8T 6-pulse (3AXD10000285688)
• Main air circuit breaker
• Module heaters (+C183)
• Module DC speed controlled fan
• Internal auxiliary voltage distribution
• Incoming unit fan
• BCU-12 Control unit
ACS880-304+A018, 2xD7T 12-pulse (3AXD10000285689)
• Main switch disconnector, AC fuses
• Main contactor
• Temperature control
• Module DOL fan supply (+C188)
• Internal auxiliary voltage distribution
• Incoming unit fan
• BCU-12 Control unit
282 Example circuit diagrams
ACS880-304-1820A-3+A018+C183+C188 (2×D8T 6-pulse connection)
￭ Sheet 001 – Main supply

=01
+01.2 CONTROL VOLTAGE MAIN SUPPLY TEMP. CONTROL 3-PHASE Main Contactor
DISTRIBUTION DISCONN. SWITCH FAN SUPPLY OPTIONAL

=-Q1.1
=-F1.1 =-Q1U1 =-Q2.1 =-Q1U2
;1L1:1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 ;1L11
=-F1.2 =-F6.1 =-Q1V1 =-Q1V2
SUPPLY ;1L2:1 3 4 1 2 1 3 4 1 ;1L21
002/2B
1 2
=-F1.3 =-Q1W1 =-Q1W2
;1L3:1 5 6 1 2 1 5 6 1 ;1L31
13 14 020/13D
;1PE:1 050/11D
CABINET COMMON PE BUSBAR

=-A1.1
VARISTOR BOARD
CVAR-01C
-RU
U1

13
1

5
U -RPE
=-Q21 V1 -RV PE
W1 U U

14
-RW

U2 U

050/11C
V2
W2
2

CVAR board A1.1 needed

PE

=01 only in UL/CSA installations

+01.1

=-X22
49 38

=-G24.1
FAN UNIT

PE GNYE
;Q26:2 TOP1 WH
020/10D
TOP2 WH
=01 =01

;TP2X:9
+01.1 +01.1 M

;XDI:1
L BU 1
BN
BK

050/10E
5G

1 =-F111.2

1 =-F111.3
;X22:3 BK BK
=-F111.1 020/6E
N

1
=-G24.2
FAN UNIT

2
PE GNYE
TOP1 WH

4PE
TOP2 WH
*) M
;XD24:1 =-2PE L BU
050/9E A1 B1 C1 1
;TP2X:9 BN
7F
=-T111 BK
6 A7 B7 C7
A6 B6 C6
=-T21X1 A7 A5 B7 B5 C7 C5 BK
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 10 A4 B4 C4 N BK
8 A3 B3 C3
A2 B2 C2
U1

TP1
TP2
380V
400V
415V
440V
460V
480V
500V

115+ 115-
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 115+
=-T21 230- 230-
230+

a4 a3 n1 n2 a2 a1 b2 b1 c2 c1
115V/230V

=-1PE1
115V

230V

3PE
N

=-T21X2
1 2 3 5 4

12
14
1

5
=-F112
2PE

11
050/12B
=-F22 =-1PE1
12
14

I> I> I>

1

6
11
050/12B

I>
2

;T21:22

;F112L:1

;F112L:2

;F112L:3
;F22:2

020/2E
020/2A

002/1G

001.DWG
22.08.2018 Vanin Oleg 2xD8T 6 pulse; Emergency stop +Q963 Circuit Diagram
RD44946 / 1410

22.08.2018 Asikainen Mika ACS880-304-1820A-3+A018+C183+C188

Main Supply 3AXD10000285426 001
002
EN
 Example circuit diagrams 283
￭ Sheet 002 – Main line, module connections

=01 DSU MODULE DSU MODULE

+01.3

;1L11

;1L21
001/16A
;1L31

=-F3.12

=-F3.13

=-F3.22

=-F3.23
1

1
=-F3.11 =-F3.21

2
=-T1.1 =-T1.2

W1

W1
U1

V1

U1

V1
See module circuit diagrams

See module circuit diagrams

~DC+ ~

DC+
DC-

DC-
>;DCP:1

>;DCM:1

=-T1.1 =-T1.2

=-X50.1 =-X50.2
;F112L:1 1 FAN U 1 FAN U

;F112L:2 2 FAN V 2 FAN V

001/10K
;F112L:3 3 FAN W 3 FAN W

;F24:2 4 BDPS L 4 BDPS L

020/10C
;X22:10:2 5 BDPS N 5 BDPS N
020/6G
6 6
;HEAT.1:L 7 HEAT L 7 HEAT L
020/12H ;HEAT.1:N 8 HEAT N 8 HEAT N

9 9

=-X53.1 GND =-X53.2 GND

1 1
24VDC 24VDC
2 2
GND GND
3 3
24 VDC 24 VDC
4 4
FE FE
5 5
;A51:V1R V10 ;A51:V2R V10
050/6K ;A51:V1T V20 050/6K ;A51:V2T V20
V30 V30
V40 V40
V60 V60
V50 V50

DC FAN AC FAN DC FAN AC FAN

X54 X55 X54 X55

FAN BOX FAN BOX

HEATER HEATER
DOL FAN DOL FAN
V1 V1
V2 V2

002.DWG
22.08.2018 Vanin Oleg 2xD8T 6 pulse; Emergency stop +Q963 Circuit Diagram
22.08.2018 Asikainen Mika ACS880-304-1820A-3+A018+C183+C188
Main line. Module connection 3AXD10000285426 002
RD8107

020
EN
284 Example circuit diagrams
￭ Sheet 020 – Auxiliary voltage distribution

=01
+01.1 MAIN BREAKER
CONTROL

=-F23 ;X22:21:1
=-X22 =-X22 050/5E
;F22:2 11 1 2 21
001/4K

I>
12 14 11
12
050/12C
13

14

15

INTERNAL POWER SUPPLY

16 ;X22:16:1 (BDPS)
1H

=-F24

1 2 ;F24:2
002/1H

I>
=-Q26
17 14 11 13 14
12
050/14B 050/4B
18 ;HEAT.CTRL:L ICU FAN SUPPLY
9J

=01
19 =-F26 +01.2
=-Q26
20 1 2 1 2 ;Q26:2 =-Q2.1
001/14E

I>
050/4B
14 11

OFF N
12 =-Q26

COM
050/14B 3 4 ;Q26:4

ON
14J
=-X22 050/4B
1 S1
A B

2 ;HEAT.CTRL:N
9J PLC PLC

3 ;X22:3
001/14F
1 2
001/12A
;T21:22 4 3 4
001/4K 001/12B
;X22:5:4 5 6
14J 001/12B
5 13 14
050/11D
21 22
;X22:6:2 6 31 32
050/3B
;X22:7:2 43 44
060/1B
;X22:7:1 7
3J
8

10 ;X22:10:2
002/1H

=-X22
PE1
1PE

=-20PE
=-F95 =-K95
21 24
;HL 2 1 11J 22 ;HEAT.1:L

I>
EXTERNAL SUPPLY FOR
MODULES HEATERS 002/1H
;HN 4 3 ;HEAT.1:N
=-G25.1

I>
for option C183
POWER 24V =-X21 FAN UNIT
6 14 11
12 PE GNYE
=-F29 5 ;Q26:4 TOP1 WH
=-T22 10E
;X22:16:1 1 2 L 2 30 VAC TOP2 WH
6C 4 ;X21:4
I>

+
5F
;X22:7:1 N ~ - L BU
M

PE ;HEAT.CTRL:L 1
14 11 2 4V DC 050/3C 6D BN
12 1 ;X21:1 BK

A1
=-X21 2 =-K95 ;X22:5:4 BK BK
EM. STOP PE2 6E N

A2

6PE
3
=-F27
=-X22 ;HEAT.CTRL:N =-20PE
6E
1 2 25 ;X22:25:1
060/1B
I>

=-X21
PE1
24 21
14 11
22
11H
5PE

12

=-20PE

020.DWG
22.08.2018 Vanin Oleg 2xD8T 6 pulse; Emergency stop +Q963 Circuit Diagram
RD44946 / 1410

22.08.2018 Asikainen Mika ACS880-304-1820A-3+A018+C183+C188

Aux. voltage distribution 3AXD10000285426 020
050
EN
 RD44946 / 1410
=01
+01.1

BCU-02

=-A51
CONTROL UNIT

V24
V23
V22
V21
-XETH
RJ45
NOT IN USE

-XPOW

RED
1
+24VIN1 ;X21:4

FAULT
WRITE
GREEN
GREEN
;X21:1 020/6H

YELLOW
0VIN1

2 3

POWER OK
+24VIN2

BATTERY OK
0VIN2
020/5F

=-A51_MEM
;X22:6:2

-X205
MEMORY MEMORY UNIT RELAY OUTPUT DESIGNATION
UNIT

10
RO1...RO3; 250VAC, 6A/24VDC, 6A

-XRO1
-RO1
020/13C
020/10D
020/10D

RUNNING NO

-X9
5
3
1

(energized = running) NC
31
21

SD CARD
53
43
13
A2

SD CARD 250 V AC / 30 V DC

13 11 12

9
COM
2A + 24V
6
4
2
=-Q26

54
44
32
22
14
A1
￭ Sheet 050 – BCU-02 control unit

-XRO2
-RO2
FAULT (-1) NO
(energized = indicates no fault) NC
250 V AC / 30 V DC

23 21 22
COM
2A + 24V

-RO3 -XRO3
MCB ctrl NO
(energized = closes main contactor/breaker) NC
250 V AC / 30 V DC
33 31 32

COM ;X22:21:1
2A + 24V 020/11A
POWER STAGE LINKS
;A51:V1T -V1T
002/1K ;A51:V1R -V1R
CH1
-X485

D2D LINK
AI1 I/U SELECTION TERMINATION B
5 6

;A51:V2T -V2T
002/4K ;A51:V2R CH2 S4 I S6 ON A
-V2R
BGND
7 8

U OFF
SHIELD

RS-485
-XD2D

AI2 I/U SELECTION GROUND SELECTION FOR D2D LINK

1

S5 I S7 ON B
A
2 3

U OFF
BGND
4

DICOM=DIOGND SHIELD
-XAI

DEFAULT INPUT DESIGNATION

1

AI1; 0(2)...10V/-10V...+10V +VREF

-VREF
2 3

AI2; 0(4)...20mA
AGND
-AI1
4

AI1 NOT SPECIFIED_01 +

5

0(2)...10V -

-AI2
6

AI2 NOT SPECIFIED_01 +

7

By default not in use -

0(4)...20mA

DEFAULT OUTPUT DESIGNATION

AO1, AO2; 0(4)...20mA
-AO1
-XAO

AO1 NOT SPECIFIED_01 +

1 2

0(4)...20mA <--> AGND

22.08.2018
22.08.2018
-AO2
AO2 NOT SPECIFIED_01 +
3 4

=-A57

0(4)...20mA <--> AGND

FDPI-02

OPEN
;XD24:1

SWITCH S1
001/5G
TERMINATION
-XD24

TERMINATED
+24DI

Vanin Oleg
5 6

DICOM
;XD24VDC:1

Asikainen Mika
+24VD 060/12G
7 8

DIOGND
DIAGNOSTICS AND PANEL INTERFACE

DEFAULT INPUT DESIGNATION

-X3
-X2
-X1
-X100

DI1...DI6+DIIL; NOMINAL VOLTAGE 24VDC

S7
DCCOM

-X13
-XDI

CONTROL PANEL -DI1

1

;XDI:1
8

TEMP FAULT_01 001/7F

15C
=-S21
001/5A
001/4C
=-Q21

-DI2
=-Q1.1

RUN ENABLE_01 14 13 14 13 14 13
-SLOT1
20
=-X22

-DI3 1 0
3
=01

MCB FEEDBACK_01 14 13
+01.2
44

-DOOR
=-A59
ACS-AP-W
=-Q2.1

-DI4
-SLOT2
020/13D

CIRCUIT BRK FAULT_01

CONTROL PANEL
20
OPTION SLOTS

-DI5
5

BCU-02 Control unit

EARTH FAULT_01
X3
FAILURE

USB
6
-SLOT3

-DI6
6

RESET_01
020/9A
=-F23
001/10J
=-F112
001/4J
=-F22

20

14 11 14 11 14 11
-X100
=-A58

-DIIL 12 12 12
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE

DPMP-01

EM STOP_01 ;XD24VDC:2
PANEL KIT

060/12K
2xD8T 6 pulse; Emergency stop +Q963
ACS880-304-1820A-3+A018+C183+C188
EM. STOP

-X103
-X102
-X101

DEFAULT INPUT/OUTPUT DESIGNATION

-XDIO

-DIO1
020/9D
020/9C

=-F26
=-F24

DIO1 NOT SPECIFIED_01 +

14 11 14 11
1 3

By default not in use 0VD

0(4)...20mA 12 12

-DIO2
-XSTO.OUT

IN1 DIO2 NOT SPECIFIED__01 +

2 4

5 6

SGND By default not in use 0VD

Circuit Diagram

0(4)...20mA
7

IN2
8

SGND
0VD
-X12

SAFETY OPTION
20

3AXD10000285426
1
0
0

-SLOT4
1
=-S21

COMMUNICATION OPTION
RDCO-04 11E
20
14 24
13 23

060
050

EN

050.DWG
Example circuit diagrams 285
286 Example circuit diagrams
￭ Sheet 060 – Emergency stop +Q963

=01
+01.1

EMERGENCY STOP, RESET EMERGENCY STOP

OPERATED

=-T61 =-X60 =-X60

;X22:25:1 L
020/3J 2 30 VAC
+ 6 7 12
020/6F
;X22:7:2 N ~ - =-X60
FE
2 4V DC 520
=-F61
=-S62 MICO 2.6

13
AUXILIARY CIRCUIT SWITCH
5F ON UP GR/RD GND
STATUS

14

23
=-X22 =-X60 ON DOWN
PE4 517 518 GR/RD
STATUS =-A61
+24VDC OUT2
=-S61
SET: 1A 3E
OUT1
6F 11 SET: 1A

21

24
FE
N
L

13 14
=-T62 2 30 VAC

41
6F
~
12

22 =-A61
2 4V DC
=-X60 3E
+
-

42
511 513

>;=01.A61.24

Y1

34
=-A62 DRIVE SECTION
14

24

12E =-A61 BCU-X2 A41 DI

=-A62 =-A62 >;=01.A62.A4
3E
12E 12E =-X60 Y2
512 514

33
13

23

=-A62

X1
=-S62 LED A1 A3
=-A61 5F

X2
24V K1 K2
POWER K1

K2
A2 A4
>;=01.A62.12

>;=01.A62.23

>;=01.T62.M

=-X60 =-X60
1 2 3 4

13 14
CROSS FAULT DETECTION =-S62 =-S61 13 14
23 24 S1 WITHOUT X1 13 23 11 21 1D 23 24
12B WITH 1D
DRIVE SECTION 33 34 33 34
12D
BCU-X2 A41 XSTO X2 14 24 12 22 43 44
41 42 START MODE 12J
7C 0 0 53 54
S2 AUTOMATIC 1 1 Y1 Y2
MANUAL 5D
7D

3C
4C
4B

EM STOP

=-A51

050/10E
CONTROL UNIT

;XD24VDC:1
-XSTO
1 OUT1 +24V

2 GND1

3 IN1 24V DC IN1

4 IN2 24V DC IN2

44
=-A62
12E
-X12
1 SAFETY OPTION

43
/
20

;XD24VDC:2
050/13E

060.DWG
22.08.2018 Vanin Oleg 2xD8T 6 pulse; Emergency stop +Q963 Circuit Diagram
RD44946 / 1410

22.08.2018 Asikainen Mika ACS880-304-1820A-3+A018+C183+C188

Emergency stop safety circuit 3AXD10000285426 060
-
EN
 Example circuit diagrams 287
ACS880-304-4560A-3+A018+C183 (5×D8T 6-pulse connection)
￭ Sheet 001 – Main supply

=01 TEMP. CONTROL

+01.3 CONTROL VOLTAGE
MAIN BREAKER
DISTRIBUTION

U<
=-Q1.1 =-F6.1
=-Q1U1 =-Q1U2
;1L1:1 2 1 2 2 ;1L11
=-Q1V1 1 2 =-F6.2 =-Q1V2
;1L2:1 2 3 4 2 ;1L21
002/8C
SUPPLY =-Q1W1 1 2 =-F6.3
;1L3:1 2 5 6 2 =-Q1W2 ;1L31
1 2
;1PE:1 030/3J
CABINET COMMON PE BUSBAR

13
1

5
=-Q21
=-A1.1

14
VARISTOR BOARD

050/11C
CVAR-01C
-RU
U1
U -RPE
V1 -RV PE

6
W1 U U
-RW
U2 U
PE

=01 V2
+01.1
W2

=-X22
49 38 CVAR board A1.1 needed
only in UL/CSA installations

;TP2X:9

;XDI:1
050/10E
7G
=-G24.1
FAN UNIT

=01 PE GNYE
+01.1
;Q26:2 TOP1 WH
020/10D
TOP2 WH
M
L BU 1
BN
BK

;X22:3 N BK BK
020/6E

=-G24.2
FAN UNIT

PE GNYE
;XD24:1 TOP1 WH
050/9E
;TP2X:9
11E

4PE
TOP2 WH
6 M
=-2PE L BU 1
=-T21X1 BN
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 10
BK
U1

TP1
TP2
380V
400V
415V
440V
460V
480V
500V

BK BK
N

7 6 5 4 3 2 1
=-T21
=-G24.3
FAN UNIT
115V/230V

PE GNYE
115V

230V
N

TOP1 WH
=-T21X2 TOP2 WH
1 2 3 5 4
M
L BU 1
BN
2PE

BK

N BK BK
=-F22 =-1PE1
12
14
1

11
050/12C

I>
2

;T21:22
;F22:2

020/2E
020/2A

001
21.08.2018 Vanin Oleg 5xD8T 6 pulse Product Circuit Diagram EFS2
21.08.2018 Asikainen Mika ACS880-304-4560A-3+A018+C183
Main supply 3AXD10000285688 001
RD8107

002
288 Example circuit diagrams
￭ Sheet 002 – Main line, module connections

=01 DSU MODULE DSU MODULE DSU MODULE DSU MODULE DSU MODULE
+01.2 =01 =01
+01.3 +01.4

=-F3.12

=-F3.13

=-F3.22

=-F3.23

=-F3.32

=-F3.33

=-F3.42

=-F3.43

=-F3.52

=-F3.53
1

1
=-F3.11 =-F3.21 =-F3.31 =-F3.41 =-F3.51

2
;1L11

;1L21

;1L31
=-T1.1 =-T1.2 =-T1.3 =-T1.4 =-T1.5

V1

W1

V1

W1

V1

W1

V1

W1

V1

W1
U1

U1

U1

U1

U1
001/16A
See module circuit diagrams

See module circuit diagrams

See module circuit diagrams

See module circuit diagrams

See module circuit diagrams

~ ~ ~ ~ ~
DC+

DC+

DC+

DC+

DC+
DC-

DC-

DC-

DC-

DC-
>;DCP:1

>;DCM:1

=-T1.1 =-T1.2 =-T1.3 =-T1.4 =-T1.5

=-X50.1 =-X50.2 =-X50.3 =-X50.4 =-X50.5

1 FAN U 1 FAN U 1 FAN U 1 FAN U 1 FAN U
2 FAN V 2 FAN V 2 FAN V 2 FAN V 2 FAN V

3 FAN W 3 FAN W 3 FAN W 3 FAN W 3 FAN W

;F24:2 4 BDPS L 4 BDPS L 4 BDPS L 4 BDPS L 4 BDPS L

020/10C
;X22:5:1 5 BDPS N 5 BDPS N 5 BDPS N 5 BDPS N 5 BDPS N
020/5E
6 6 6 6 6
;HEAT.1:L 7 HEAT L 7 HEAT L 7 HEAT L 7 HEAT L 7 HEAT L
020/12H ;HEAT.1:N 8 HEAT N 8 HEAT N 8 HEAT N 8 HEAT N 8 HEAT N
9 9 9 9 9

=-X53.1 GND =-X53.2 GND =-X53.3 GND =-X53.4 GND =-X53.5 GND
1 1 1 1 1
24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC
2 2 2 2 2
GND GND GND GND GND
3 3 3 3 3
24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC
4 4 4 4 4
FE FE FE FE FE
5 5 5 5 5
;A51:V1R V10 ;A51:V2R V10 ;A51:V3R V10 ;A51:V4R V10 ;A51:V5R V10
050/6K ;A51:V1T V20 050/6K ;A51:V2T V20 050/6K ;A51:V3T V20 050/7K ;A51:V4T V20 050/7K ;A51:V5T V20
V30 V30 V30 V30 V30
V40 V40 V40 V40 V40
V60 V60 V60 V60 V60
V50 V50 V50 V50 V50

DC FAN DC FAN DC FAN DC FAN DC FAN

X54 X55 X54 X55 X54 X55 X54 X55 X54 X55

FAN BOX FAN BOX FAN BOX FAN BOX FAN BOX

HEATER HEATER HEATER HEATER HEATER

DC FAN DC FAN DC FAN DC FAN DC FAN
V1 V1 V1 V1 V1
V2 V2 V2 V2 V2

002
21.08.2018 Vanin Oleg 5xD8T 6 pulse Product Circuit Diagram EFS2
21.08.2018 Asikainen Mika ACS880-304-4560A-3+A018+C183
Main line, module connection 3AXD10000285688 002
RD8107

020
 Example circuit diagrams 289
￭ Sheet 020 – Auxiliary voltage distribution

=01
+01.1 MAIN BREAKER
CONTROL

=-F23 ;X22:21:1
=-X22 =-X22 050/5E
;F22:2 11 1 2 21 ;X22:21:2
001/6K 030/1C

I>
14 11 22 ;X22:22:1
12 030/5E
12
050/12C

13

14

15 ;X22:15:1
1H

INTERNAL POWER SUPPLY

(BDPS)
16
=-F24
17
1 2 ;F24:2
002/1H

I>
14 11
18 ;HEAT.CTRL:L
9J 12
050/12D
19 ICU FAN SUPPLY

20 35
=-F26
=-Q26
1 2 1 2 ;Q26:2
001/15F

I>
050/4B
14 11
12 =-Q26
050/12D 3 4 ;Q26:4
15H
=-X22 050/4B
1

;T21:22 3 ;X22:3
001/7K 001/15F
4
;X22:5:1 ;X22:5:4
002/1H 15J
;X22:5:2 5
030/1K
;X22:6:2 6
050/3B
;X22:7:1 7
3J
8 ;HEAT.CTRL:N
9J
9

10

=-X22
PE1
1PE

=-20PE
=-F95 =-K95
21 24
;HL 2 1 11J 22 ;HEAT.1:L

I>
EXTERNAL SUPPLY FOR
MODULES HEATERS 002/1H
;HN 4 3 ;HEAT.1:N
=-G25.1

I>
for option C183
POWER 24V =-X21 FAN UNIT
6 14 11
12 PE GNYE
=-F29 5 ;Q26:4 TOP1 WH
=-T22 10E
;X22:15:1 1 2 L 2 30 VAC TOP2 WH
6C 4 ;X21:4
I>

+
5F
;X22:7:1 N ~ -
050/3C
L BU
M

PE ;HEAT.CTRL:L 1
14 11 2 4V DC 6D BN
12 1 ;X21:1 BK
050/3C

A1
=-X21 2 =-K95 ;X22:5:4 N BK BK
PE2 6E

A2

6PE
3

;HEAT.CTRL:N =-20PE
6F
=-X21
PE1
24 21
22
11H
5PE

=-20PE

020
21.08.2018 Vanin Oleg 5xD8T 6 pulse Product Circuit Diagram EFS2
21.08.2018 Asikainen Mika ACS880-304-4560A-3+A018+C183
RD34007

Aux. Voltage Distribution 3AXD10000285688 020

030
290 Example circuit diagrams
￭ Sheet 030 – Main circuit breaker control

=01
+01.3
UNDERVOLTAGE AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER
RELEASE CONTROL ON/OFF

;X22:21:2
020/11A

020/11B

050/5B

050/5B
=01
+01.1

;ACB1:YC

;ACB1:YO
;X22:22:1

=-X22 =-X22
40 41 42 43

=-T30
L 2 30 VAC
+
N ~ -
FE
2 4V DC

1FE
104
102

=-Q1.1
3J
101

=-Q1.1 K1 K2 C3 C1 35 36 38 62 64 61 D1 C13 C11 32 34 31 U1

S 33 M/2

S 33 M/1

YC YO

YC YU YO
M

52
54

22
24
C2 NE+ NE- W3 W4 D2 C12 U2
=-Q1.1 =-Q1.1
3J 3J

51

21
;X22:5:2
020/5F

1 2 44 41 54 51 94 91 102 101 Contact position

001/9A when racked in
3 4 42 52 92 104
001/9B 11J 5H 112 111
5 6 74 71 04 01
001/9B 114
14 11 72 02
Position when
12 84 81 124 121 not test
050/11C 122
24 21 82
22 134 131
11J Position when
132 not racked out
144 141
142

030
21.08.2018 Vanin Oleg 5xD8T 6 pulse Product Circuit Diagram EFS2
21.08.2018 Asikainen Mika ACS880-304-4560A-3+A018+C183
Air circuit breaker control 3AXD10000285688 030
RD8112

050
RD34007
=01
+01.1

BCU-12

=-A51
CONTROL UNIT

V24
V23
V22
V21
-XETH
RJ45
NOT IN USE

-XPOW

RED
1
+24VIN1 ;X21:4

FAULT
WRITE
020/6H

GREEN
GREEN
;X21:1

YELLOW
0VIN1 020/6J

2 3

POWER OK
+24VIN2

BATTERY OK
0VIN2
020/5F

=-A51_MEM
;X22:6:2

-X205
MEMORY MEMORY UNIT RELAY OUTPUT DESIGNATION
UNIT

10
RO1...RO3

-XRO1
-RO1
020/10D
020/10E

RUNNING NO

-X9
5
3
1

(energized = running) NC
31
21

SD CARD
53
43
13
A2

SD CARD 250 V AC / 30 V DC

13 11 12

9
COM
2A + 24V
6
4
2
=-Q26

54
44
32
22
14
A1
￭ Sheet 050 – BCU-12 control unit

-XRO2
-RO2
FAULT (-1) NO
(energized = indicates no fault) NC
250 V AC / 30 V DC

23 21 22
COM
2A + 24V

-RO3 -XRO3
=-X22
28

MCB ctrl NO ;ACB1:YC

(energized = closes main contactor/breaker) 030/6E
NC
250 V AC / 30 V DC
33 31 32

COM ;X22:21:1
2A + 24V 020/11A
POWER STAGE LINKS ;ACB1:YO
030/6E
;A51:V1T -V1T
002/1K ;A51:V1R -V1R
CH1
-X485

D2D LINK
AI1 I/U SELECTION TERMINATION B
5 6

;A51:V2T -V2T
002/4K ;A51:V2R CH2 S4 I S6 ON A
-V2R
BGND
7 8

U OFF
SHIELD
;A51:V3T -V3T
002/6K ;A51:V3R -V3R
CH3
RS-485
-XD2D

AI2 I/U SELECTION GROUND SELECTION FOR D2D LINK

1

;A51:V4T -V4T S5 I S7 ON B
CH4 A
2 3

002/10K ;A51:V4R -V4R U OFF

BGND
4

DICOM=DIOGND SHIELD
;A51:V5T -V5T
002/12K ;A51:V5R -V5R
CH5
-XAI

PSL EXTENSION BOARD 1

DEFAULT INPUT DESIGNATION
1

+10VREF
AI1; 0(2)...10V/-10V...+10V
AGND
2 3

-V6T AI2; 0(4)...20mA

-V6R
CH6 -10VREF
-AI1
4

AI1 NOT SPECIFIED_01 +

5

0(2)...10V -
-V7T
-V7R
CH7
-AI2
6

AI2 NOT SPECIFIED_01 +

7

By default not in use -

0(4)...20mA

DEFAULT OUTPUT DESIGNATION

AO1, AO2; 0(4)...20mA
-AO1
-XAO

AO1 NOT SPECIFIED_01 +

1 2

0(4)...20mA <--> AGND

21.08.2018
21.08.2018
-AO2
AO2 NOT SPECIFIED_01 +
3 4

0(4)...20mA <--> AGND

;XD24:1
001/7G
-XD24

+24DI

Vanin Oleg
5 6

DICOM

Asikainen Mika
+24VD
7 8

DIOGND

DEFAULT INPUT DESIGNATION

DI1...DI6+DIIL; NOMINAL VOLTAGE 24VDC
S7
DCCOM
-XDI

-DI1
1

TEMP FAULT_01 ;XDI:1

001/11E
-XSTO
=01

OUT1 +24V
+01.3

1 2
16A
=-S21

SGND
001/6C

-DI2
2

IN1 RUN ENABLE_01 14 13 14 13

24V DC IN1
3 4

IN2 24V DC IN2

12
=-X22

-DI3 1 0
=-Q21 =-Q1.1

MCB FEEDBACK_01 11 14
44

030/3J

-DI4
4

CIRCUIT BRK FAULT_01

-XSTO.OUT
5

IN1
5xD8T 6 pulse
=-A57

SGND
FDPI-02

-DI5
6 7

IN2
5

BCU-12 Control unit

EARTH FAULT_01
OPEN
8

SGND
SWITCH S1
TERMINATION
FAILURE

TERMINATED

-DI6
6

SAFETY OPTION RESET_01

020/9D
020/9C
020/9A

=-F26
=-F24
=-F23
001/6J
=-F22

-X12

14 11 14 11 14 11 14 11
-DIIL 12 12 12 12
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE

ACS880-304-4560A-3+A018+C183
20
7

EM STOP_01
DIAGNOSTICS AND PANEL INTERFACE

-X3
-X2
-X1
-X100
-SLOT1

OPTION SLOTS
20

-SLOT2

DEFAULT INPUT/OUTPUT DESIGNATION

-XDIO

-DIO1
DIO1 NOT SPECIFIED_01 +
20
1 3

By default not in use 0VD

0(4)...20mA
-DOOR
=-A59

-DIO2
-SLOT3

DIO2 NOT SPECIFIED__01 +

ACS-AP-W
2 4

By default not in use 0VD

20

0(4)...20mA
CONTROL PANEL

0VD
Product Circuit Diagram
X3

USB
6

COMMUNICATION OPTION
-SLOT4

RDCO-04
20

3AXD10000285688
-X100
=-A58
DPMP-01
-X13

PANEL KIT

RJ45 FOR PANEL

-X103
-X102
-X101
1
0

EFS2
0
1
=-S21

11E
14 24
13 23

050
-

050
Example circuit diagrams 291
292 Example circuit diagrams
ACS880-304-0910A-3+A003+A018+C188 (2×D7T 12-pulse connection)
￭ Sheet 001 – Main supply

=01
+01.2 CONTROL VOLTAGE MAIN SUPPLY TEMP. CONTROL Main Contactors
DISTRIBUTION DISCONN. SWITCH OPTIONAL

=-Q1.1 =-F6.1 =-Q1U3

=-Q1U1 =-F1.1
;1L1:1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 ;1L11
=-Q1V1 1 2 =-Q2.2 =-Q1V3
SUPPLY =-F1.2
;1L2:1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 1 ;1L21
002/2A
=-Q1W1 =-F1.3
;1L3:1 2 5 6 1 2 5 6 1 =-Q1W3 ;1L31
13 14
;1PE:1 050/11D NOTE *
=-A1.1
CABINET COMMON PE BUSBAR

VARISTOR BOARD
CVAR-01C
-RU
U1
U -RPE
V1 -RV PE
W1 U U

13
1

5
-RW
=-Q21 =01
+01.1 U2 U

14
V2
W2

050/11B
=-X22
49 38
2

6
CVAR board A1.1 needed
=01 only in UL/CSA installations
+01.1
PE

;TP2X:9

;F6:1
;XD24:1
050/9E
6 ;TP2X:9

5D

8K
8D
=-T21X1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 10
U1

TP1
TP2
380V
400V
415V
440V
460V
480V
500V

7 6 5 4 3 2 1
=-T21
115V/230V

115V

230V
N

=-T21X2
1 2 3 5 4

=-F22 =-A1.2
12
14

2PE
1

VARISTOR BOARD
CVAR-01C
-RU
U1
11

U -RPE
=-1PE1 V1 -RV PE
050/12B

I> W1 U U
-RW
2

;T21:22

U2 U
;F22:2

V2
W2
020/2A

020/2E

CVAR board A1.2 needed

only in UL/CSA installations

=-Q1.1 =-Q1U4
=-F1.4 =-Q2.1
;2L1 7 8 1 2 1 2 1 ;2L11
=-F1.5 =-Q1V4
SUPPLY ;2L2 9 10 1 2 5 6 1 ;2L21
002/4A
=-F1.6 =-F6.2
020/14D =-Q1W4
;2L3 11 12 1 2 3 4 1 ;2L31
1 2
33 34 020/16D
;1PE:1 050/11C
CABINET COMMON PE BUSBAR

=-G24.1
FAN UNIT
W2E200-HH38-06
PE GNYE
;Q26:2 TOP1 WH
020/10D
TOP2 WH
PE

M
L BU 1
BN
BK

;X22:3 N BK BK
020/6E
;XDI:1
;F6:1

14PE
050/10E
9D

=-1PE5

001.DWG
NOTE * - CONTACTOR POLES CONNECTION BASED ON CABINET BUILT DRIVES FOR MECHANICAL REASON.
SEPARATE CONTACTORS FOR SUPPLIES ARE POSSIBLE.

22.08.2018 Vanin Oleg 2xD7T 12 pulse Circuit Diagram

22.08.2018 Asikainen Mika ACS880-304-0910A-3+A004+A018+C188
RD34058

Main supply 3AXD10000285689 001

002
EN
 Example circuit diagrams 293
￭ Sheet 002 – Main line, module connections

=01 DSU MODULE DSU MODULE

+01.3

;1L11 ;2L11

;1L21 ;2L21
001/16A 001/16G
;1L31 ;2L31

=-T1.1 =-T1.2

W1

W1
U1

V1

U1

V1
See module circuit diagrams

See module circuit diagrams

~ ~
DC+

DC+
DC-

DC-
>;DCP:1

>;DCM:1

=-T1.1 =-T1.2

=-X50.1 =-X50.2
;DOL FAN:L 1 FAN L 1 FAN L
020/10E
;DOL FAN:N 2 FAN N 2 FAN N
020/6F
3 PE 3 PE
;F24:2 4 BDPS L 4 BDPS L
020/10C
;X22:5:1 5 BDPS N 5 BDPS N
020/5E
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9

=-X53.1 GND =-X53.2 GND

1 1
24VDC 24VDC
2 2
GND GND
3 3
24 VDC 24 VDC
4 4
FE FE
5 5
;A51:V1R V10 ;A51:V2R V10
050/6K ;A51:V1T V20 050/6K ;A51:V2T V20
V30 V30
V40 V40
V60 V60
V50 V50

DC FAN AC FAN DC FAN AC FAN

X54 X55 X54 X55

FAN BOX FAN BOX

DOL FAN DOL FAN

V1 V1
V2 V2

002.DWG
22.08.2018 Vanin Oleg 2xD7T 12 pulse Circuit Diagram
22.08.2018 Asikainen Mika ACS880-304-0910A-3+A004+A018+C188
Main line, module connections 3AXD10000285689 002
RD8107

020
EN
294 Example circuit diagrams
￭ Sheet 020 – Auxiliary voltage distribution

=01
+01.1 MAIN BREAKER
CONTROL

=-F23.1 ;X22:21:1
=-X22 =-X22 050/5E =-X22 =-X22
;F22:2 11 1 2 21 30 ;X22:24:1 35
001/4G 11C

I>
14 11 22 31 36
12
12
050/12B
MAIN BREAKER
CONTROL
13
=-F23.2 32 37
=-Q26
14 1 2 23 33 43 44

I>
050/4A
15 ;X22:15:1 14 11 24
1H
12
050/12C ;X22:24:1
INTERNAL POWER SUPPLY 13A
(BDPS)
16
=-Q26
=-F24 13 14
17
1 2 ;F24:2 =01 050/4A
002/2G

I>
+01.2
14 11
18
12 =-Q2.1 =-Q2.2
050/12C
19
ICU FAN SUPPLY

OFF N

OFF N
COM

COM
20

ON

ON
=-F26
=-Q26
1 2 1 2 ;Q26:2 S1 S1
001/14J A B A B

I>
050/4A
14 11
PLC PLC PLC PLC
12
050/12D

=-X22 MODULE DOL FAN SUPPLY 1 2 1 2

001/11G 001/11B
1 3 4 3 4
001/11A 001/11H
=-F28 5 6 5 6
001/11H 001/11B
2 13 14 13 14
050/11B 050/11C
1 2 ;DOL FAN:L 21 22 21 22
002/2F

I>
;T21:22 3 ;X22:3 31 32 31 32
001/5G 001/14K
14 11 43 44 43 44
4 12
050/12C
;X22:5:1
002/2G
5

;X22:6:2 6
050/3A
;X22:7:1 7
3J
8

9 ;DOL FAN:N
002/2F
10

=-X22
PE1
1PE

=-20PE

POWER 24V =-X21

6

=-F29 5
=-T22
;X22:15:1 1 2 L 2 30 VAC
6C 4 ;X21:4
I>

+
5F
;X22:7:1 N ~ -
050/3C
PE
14 11 2 4V DC

12 1 ;X21:1
050/3C
=-X21 2
PE2

=-X21
PE1
5PE

=-20PE

020.DWG
22.08.2018 Tuomi Joni 2xD7T 12 pulse Circuit Diagram
22.08.2018 Asikainen Mika ACS880-304-0910A-3+A004+A018+C188
RD34058

Aux. Voltage Distribution 3AXD10000285689 020

050
EN
 RD34058
=01
+01.1

BCU-02

=-A51
CONTROL UNIT

V24
V23
V22
V21
-XETH
RJ45
NOT IN USE

-XPOW

RED
1
+24VIN1 ;X21:4

FAULT
WRITE
020/6H

GREEN
GREEN
;X21:1

YELLOW
0VIN1 020/6J

2 3

POWER OK
+24VIN2

BATTERY OK
0VIN2
020/5F

=-A51_MEM
;X22:6:2

-X205
MEMORY MEMORY UNIT RELAY OUTPUT DESIGNATION
UNIT

10
RO1...RO3

-XRO1
-RO1
020/13C
020/10D

020/14B

RUNNING NO

-X9
5
3
1

(energized = running) NC
31
21

SD CARD
53
43
13
A2

SD CARD 250 V AC / 30 V DC

13 11 12

9
COM
2A + 24V
6
4
2
=-Q26

54
44
32
22
14
A1
￭ Sheet 050 – BCU-02 control unit

-XRO2
-RO2
FAULT (-1) NO
(energized = indicates no fault) NC
250 V AC / 30 V DC

23 21 22
COM
2A + 24V

-RO3 -XRO3
MCB ctrl NO
(energized = closes main contactor/breaker) NC
250 V AC / 30 V DC
33 31 32

COM ;X22:21:1
2A + 24V 020/11A
POWER STAGE LINKS
;A51:V1T -V1T
002/2J ;A51:V1R -V1R
CH1
-X485

D2D LINK
AI1 I/U SELECTION TERMINATION B
5 6

;A51:V2T -V2T
002/4J ;A51:V2R CH2 S4 I S6 ON A
-V2R
BGND
7 8

U OFF
SHIELD

RS-485
-XD2D

AI2 I/U SELECTION GROUND SELECTION FOR D2D LINK

1

S5 I S7 ON B
A
2 3

U OFF
BGND
4

DICOM=DIOGND SHIELD
-XAI

DEFAULT INPUT DESIGNATION

1

+10VREF
AI1; 0(2)...10V/-10V...+10V
AGND
2 3

AI2; 0(4)...20mA
-10VREF
-AI1
4

AI1 NOT SPECIFIED_01 +

5

0(2)...10V -

-AI2
6

AI2 NOT SPECIFIED_01 +

7

By default not in use -

0(4)...20mA

DEFAULT OUTPUT DESIGNATION

AO1, AO2; 0(4)...20mA
-AO1
-XAO

AO1 NOT SPECIFIED_01 +

1 2

0(4)...20mA <--> AGND

22.08.2018
22.08.2018
-AO2
AO2 NOT SPECIFIED_01 +
3 4

0(4)...20mA <--> AGND

;XD24:1
001/5D
-XD24

+24DI

Vanin Oleg
5 6

DICOM

Asikainen Mika
+24VD
7 8

DIOGND

DEFAULT INPUT DESIGNATION

DI1...DI6+DIIL; NOMINAL VOLTAGE 24VDC
S7
DCCOM
-XDI

-DI1
1

TEMP FAULT_01 ;XDI:1

001/9K
-XSTO
=01

OUT1 +24V
+01.2

1 2
16A
=-S21

SGND
001/4C

001/7G
001/7G
=-Q21

-DI2
=-Q1.1
=-Q1.1

IN1 RUN ENABLE_01 14 13 14 13 34 33 14 13

24V DC IN1
3 4

IN2 24V DC IN2

=-X22

-DI3 1 0
=-Q2.2
=-Q2.1

MCB FEEDBACK_01 14 13 14 13
44

-DI4
020/16D
020/14D

CIRCUIT BRK FAULT_01

-XSTO.OUT
5

IN1
2xD7T 12 pulse
=-A57

SGND
FDPI-02

-DI5
6 7

IN2
5

BCU-02 Control unit

EARTH FAULT_01
OPEN
8

SGND
SWITCH S1
TERMINATION
FAILURE

TERMINATED

-DI6
6

SAFETY OPTION RESET_01

=-F23.2
=-F23.1

020/9D
020/9C

020/9E
020/9B
020/9A
001/4F

=-F28
=-F26
=-F24
=-F22

-X12

14 11 14 11 14 11 14 11 14 11 14 11
-DIIL 12 12 12 12 12 12
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE

20
7

EM STOP_01
DIAGNOSTICS AND PANEL INTERFACE

-X3
-X2
-X1
-X100

ACS880-304-0910A-3+A004+A018+C188
-SLOT1

OPTION SLOTS
20

-SLOT2

DEFAULT INPUT/OUTPUT DESIGNATION

-XDIO

-DIO1
DIO1 NOT SPECIFIED_01 +
20
1 3

By default not in use 0VD

0(4)...20mA
-DOOR
=-A59

-DIO2
-SLOT3

DIO2 NOT SPECIFIED__01 +

ACS-AP-W
2 4

By default not in use 0VD

20

Circuit Diagram

0(4)...20mA
CONTROL PANEL

0VD
X3

USB
6

COMMUNICATION OPTION
-SLOT4

RDCO-04
20

3AXD10000285689
-X100
=-A58
DPMP-01
-X13

PANEL KIT

RJ45 FOR PANEL

-X103
-X102
-X101
1
0
0
1
=-S21

11E
14 24
13 23

050

EN
-

050.DWG
Example circuit diagrams 295
296 Example circuit diagrams
—
Further information
Product and service inquiries
Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative, quoting the type
designation and serial number of the unit in question. A listing of ABB sales, support and service
contacts can be found by navigating to www.abb.com/searchchannels.

Product training
For information on ABB product training, navigate to new.abb.com/service/training.

Providing feedback on ABB manuals

Your comments on our manuals are welcome. Navigate to
new.abb.com/drives/manuals-feedback-form.

Document library on the Internet

You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet at
www.abb.com/drives/documents.

a4 (frozen)
PDF-A4
Created 2022-02-07, 08:31:15
www.abb.com/drives

3AXD50000010104G

3AXD50000010104 Rev G (EN) 2022-02-03

© Copyright 2022 ABB. All rights reserved.

Specifications subject to change without notice.